Owner's Manual - Chevrolet City Express Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada- Black plate (1,1) 7707496) - 2015 - CRC - 8/13/14 ... Stability Control M: Windshield Washer Fluid

2k15_chev_city_express_23433684A.ai

(Modern Bridge - Level 2 / #23321109)

Spine = Printer Adjust

Color = Black

Date = 08/18/14

2015

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet City Express Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-7707496) - 2015 - CRC - 8/13/14

2015 Chevrolet City Express Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-21

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-18Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-25Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-30Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-41

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55


2015 Chevrolet City Express Owner Manual M

Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-10Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-12

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andCITY EXPRESS are trademarksand/or service marks of GeneralMotors LLC, its subsidiaries,affiliates, or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, countryspecifications, features/applicationsthat may not be available in yourregion, or changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.

Refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm thefeatures.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 23433684 A First Printing ©2014 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

{ Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see the owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

H or! : Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)


Introduction v

I or$ : Brake SystemWarning Light

" : Charging System

J : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

i : Top Tether Anchors for ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

G : Turn Signal

d : Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-12Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-12Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-15Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-3.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-3.

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-7.

4. Cruise Control on page 9-28 (IfEquipped).

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-2.

6. Rear Window Defogger andHeated Mirror Button (ifEquipped). See Climate ControlSystems on page 8-1 andHeated Mirrors on page 2-13.

7. Infotainment on page 7-1.

8. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-25.

9. Power Mirrors on page 2-13 (IfEquipped).

10. Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10-25.

11. Fuel Door Release. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9-38.

Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-5.

12. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2 (If Equipped).

13. Ignition Positions onpage 9-14.

14. Parking Assist on page 9-30 (IfEquipped).

15. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-2.

16. Shift Lever. See ContinuouslyVariable Transmission (CVT)on page 9-18.

17. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-10.

18. Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemIf equipped, the RKE transmitter isused to remotely lock and unlockthe doors from up to 10 m (33 ft)away from the vehicle.


1-4 In Brief

Keyless Access

Q : Press to lock all doors.

The hazard warning flashers flashtwice and the horn chirps once toindicate all doors are locked.

If a door is open and Q is pressed,the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warningflashers will not flash. The horn mayor may not beep. See “Silencing theHorn Sound Feature” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

K : Press once to unlock the driverdoor. The hazard warning flashersflash once if all doors are closedwith the ignition switch in anyposition except ON.

The interior lamp comes on and thelamp timer activates for 30 secondswhen the interior lamp switch is inthe DOOR position with the ignitionswitch in any position except ON.The interior lamp can beimmediately turned off by insertingthe key into the ignition switch andplacing the ignition switch in ON orSTART, by locking the doors withthe RKE transmitter, by pressing thedoor switch, or by pressing OFF onthe interior lamp switch.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors. Thehazard warning flashers flash onceif all doors are completely closed.

When K is pressed, all doors willautomatically lock within one minuteunless a door is opened, the ignitionswitch is turned from OFF to ON,or Q is pressed.

7 : Press and hold 7 to sound thepanic alarm. Press any button onthe RKE transmitter to cancel thepanic alarm.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the door from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped. From the inside, slidethe manual lever on the doorforward to lock and rearward tounlock.

See Door Locks on page 2-5.


In Brief 1-5

Power Door Locks

On the front doors, press Q or K onthe power door lock switch to lock orunlock the doors.

See Power Door Locks on page 2-6.

Windows

Power Windows

The power window controls (1) areon the front doors. The driver dooralso has a control (2) to operate thefront passenger window.

Press or pull up on the switch tolower or raise the window.

Express-Up/Down

If equipped, the front windows havean express feature that allows thewindow to be raised or loweredwithout holding the switch. Press orpull the switch fully and release it toactivate the express feature.

This mode can be canceled bybriefly pressing or pulling the switch.

See Power Windows on page 2-14.

Seat Adjustment

Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.


1-6 In Brief

To lift the seat, pull up or push downthe lever to adjust the seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Lumbar Adjustment

On the driver seat, move the leveron the inboard side of the seatforward or rearward.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the side ofthe seat.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


In Brief 1-7

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-4.

Folding Seatback

The front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint all theway. See Head Restraints onpage 3-2.

2. Move the seat as far back aspossible. See Seat Adjustmenton page 3-3.

3. Lift the lever fully and fold theseatback forward until itdisengages.

4. Lift the latch on the inboard sideof the seatback to releasethe seat.


1-8 In Brief

5. Fold the seatback flat over theseat cushion.

To raise the seatback:

1. Raise the seatback and push itrearward.

2. Pull up on the recline lever andlean the seatback to the uprightseating position. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3-4.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

See Folding Seatback on page 3-6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-9.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-10.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-38.


In Brief 1-9

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-22.

The passenger airbag statusindicator is under the climatecontrols and is visible when the

vehicle is started. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-10.

Mirror Adjustment

Interior Mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-13.

Exterior Mirrors

If equipped with manual outsidemirrors, adjust by pressing up,down, left, or right on the mirror tohave a clear view of objectsbehind you.

If equipped with power outsidemirrors, adjust by selecting the leftor right mirror (1) and then use thecontrol pad (2) to move each mirrorto the desired position. See PowerMirrors on page 2-13.


1-10 In Brief

Interior LightingThe dome lamp and reading lampsare in the overhead console.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp operates in anyignition switch position.

The dome lamp switch has threepositions, press the switch to adjustthe settings.

Press (1) to turn the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open. When theswitch is in the (2) position, the lampcomes on when a door is opened.Press (3) to turn the lamp on.

Reading Lamps

Press (1) to turn the reading lampon or (2) to turn the readinglamp off.

See Dome Lamps on page 6-4.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever on the left side ofthe steering column.

There are three positions:

OFF: Turns all the lamps off,except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-2


In Brief 1-11

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in the ON position,move the windshield wiper leverdown to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Use for intermittent wipes. Toadjust wipe frequency, turn the INTTIME band forward for less frequentwipes or rearward for more frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

MIST: For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever up.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-2.

Climate ControlsThe vehicle’s heating, cooling, andventilation can be controlled withthis system.

1. Air Delivery Mode Control

2. Outside Air/Recirculation AirIntake Control

3. Temperature Control

4. Heated Mirrors (If Equipped)

5. Rear Window Defogger (IfEquipped)

6. Fan Control

7. A/C (Air Conditioning)

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1.


1-12 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemThe base radio information isincluded in this manual. See theinfotainment manual for informationon the uplevel radio, audio player,phone, navigation system, andvoice recognition. There is alsoinformation on settings.

Radio(s)The ignition most be in ACC/ACCESSORY or RUN/START.

PUSH/PWR: Press to turn thesystem on and off.

VOL: Turn to increase or decreasethe volume.

AM: Press to change to AMstations.

FM: Press to change to FMstations and press to changebetween FM1 and FM2.

CD: Press to change to play a CD.

AUX: Press to change to anauxiliary device.

> : Press to mute and unmute theaudio.

r SEEK/TRACKq : Radio:Press to fast seek or scan stations.

Q TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER R :Press to seek or scan one station ata time.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7-1.

Storing a Favorite Station

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

For more information on storing afavorite station, see Operation onpage 7-4.

Setting the Clock

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5-3.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary inputjack on the lower right side of thefaceplate. External devices such asan iPod®, laptop computer, MP3player, cassette player, or CDchanger can be connected to theauxiliary port using a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) input cable.

This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

See Auxiliary Jack on page 7-9.

Bluetooth®

If equipped with a Bluetooth system,it allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will support


In Brief 1-13

all functions. For more information,see www.gm.com/bluetooth andBluetooth on page 7-10.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio and Bluetooth® controls(if equipped) can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

SOURCE: Press to changebetween AM, FM, CD, and AUXdevices.

g ord : While in one of thepreset radio station banks, pressand hold for less than 1.5 secondsto change to the previous or nextpreset radio station or press to go tothe previous or next track on a CD.

Press and hold for more than1.5 seconds to change to theprevious or next radio station.

Press to change the Bluetoothsystem language. See “Choosing aLanguage” in Bluetooth onpage 7-10.

V : If equipped, press and hold toend a call or reject a call.

gV : If equipped, press to interactwith Bluetooth or answer anincoming call. See Bluetooth onpage 7-10.

x − or x +: Press x − to decreasevolume or press x + to increase thevolume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

Cruise Control

If equipped with cruise control, usethe following buttons:

CRUISE ON/OFF: Press to turncruise control on or off. The whiteindicator comes on in the instrumentcluster when cruise control isturned on.


1-14 In Brief

ACCEL/RES (Accelerate/Resume): If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate. If cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.

COAST/SET: Press briefly to setthe speed and activate cruisecontrol, or press and hold todecelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasevehicle speed.

CANCEL: Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-28.

Trip ComputerThe vehicle may have a tripcomputer. It provides the driver withdriving information such as thedriving distance for the remainingfuel, average fuel economy, andinstant fuel economy.

Use the trip odometer reset stem inthe cluster to cycle through theavailable trip computer displays.

See Trip Computer on page 5-20.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on theinfotainment system display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-31.

Parking AssistIf equipped, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than5 km/h (3 mph). Rear Parking Assist(RPA) uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Parking Assist on page 9-30.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets:. Near the bottom of the center

stack.. On the rear of the center floor

console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-4.


In Brief 1-15

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and an ElectronicStability Control system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems turn on automatically everytime the vehicle is started.. To turn off the TCS and

Electronic Stability Controlsystems, press and release theTCS/Electronic Stability Controlbutton g on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. The g indicator will comeon in the instrument cluster.

. Press and release the TCS/Electronic Stability Controlbutton again to turn the TCS andElectronic Stability Control

systems back on. The gindicator will turn off in theinstrument cluster.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-25.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-36.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.


1-16 In Brief

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same size and type as theoriginals.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New Chevrolet owners areautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance Program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

DoorsSliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Back Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-13Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Key Access

Keyless Access

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

A key number plate is supplied withthe keys. Record the key numberand keep it in a safe place not in thevehicle. If the key is lost, see adealer for duplicates by using thekey number. Key numbers are notrecorded so it is very important tokeep track of the key number plate.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationIf equipped, the RKE transmitterfunctions work up to 10 m (33 ft)away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

The hazard warning flashers flashtwice and the horn chirps once toindicate all doors are locked.

If a door is open and Q is pressed,the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warningflashers will not flash. The horn canbe disabled. See “Silencing theHorn Sound Feature” in this section.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. The hazard warningflashers flash once if all doors areclosed with the ignition switch in anyposition except ON.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors. Thehazard warning flashers flash onceif all doors are completely closed.

The interior lamp comes on and thelamp timer activates for 30 secondswhen the interior lamp switch is inthe DOOR position with the ignitionswitch in any position except ON.The interior lamp can beimmediately turned off by insertingthe key into the ignition switch and

placing the ignition switch in ON orSTART, by locking the doors withthe RKE transmitter, by pressing thedoor lock switch, or by pressingOFF on the interior lamp switch.


7 (Panic Alarm): Press and hold7 to sound the panic alarm. Pressany button on the RKE transmitterto cancel the panic alarm. The panicalarm will not work if the key is inthe ignition.

Auto Relock




Silencing the Horn Sound Feature

The Horn Sound feature can bedeactivated using the RKEtransmitter.

Press and hold Q and K for at leasttwo seconds to deactivate the hornsound. The hazard warning flasherswill flash three times to confirm thatthe horn sound feature has beendeactivated.

Press and hold again for at leasttwo seconds to activate the hornsound. The hazard warning flasherswill flash once and the horn willsound once to confirm that the hornsound is activated. The horn soundwill not deactivate if the alarm istriggered.

The RKE transmitter buttons will notoperate when the key is in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofive transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw.

2. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin tool.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located along theparting line of thetransmitter.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

3. Remove the old battery.



4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing the bottom of thecase. Replace with a CR1620 orequivalent battery.

5. Close the lid and install thescrew securely.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

Manual Door Locks

Lock and unlock the doors from theoutside using the key or the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,if equipped.

If the vehicle is equipped withKeyless Entry, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

Front Doors

From the outside, turn the keytoward the front of the vehicle tolock and toward the rear to unlock.



From the inside, move the insidelock knob inward to the lockposition, then close the door. Tounlock, move the inside lock knoboutward to the unlock position.

Sliding Doors

From the outside, turn the keytoward the front of the vehicle tolock and toward the rear to unlock.

From the inside, slide the leverforward (2) to lock and rearward (1)to unlock.

Back Door

Turn the key toward the right of thevehicle to lock. Turn the key towardthe left of the vehicle to unlock.

From the inside, push the leverinward to lock (1) or pull outward tounlock (2).

Power Door LocksFrom the outside, if equipped, turnthe key toward the front of thevehicle to lock all doors. Turn thekey rearward one time to unlock thatdoor. Turn the key rearward againwithin five seconds to unlock alldoors.



From the inside, press Q or K onthe power door lock switch to lock orunlock the doors.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen the vehicle speed reaches24 km/h (15 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on a door.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

The doors will unlock automaticallywhen the ignition is placed in theOFF position or when the key isremoved from the ignition.

To deactivate or activate automaticdoor unlock:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in the ONposition.

3. Within 20 seconds of performingStep 2, press and hold K on thepower door lock switch for morethan five seconds.

4. When activated, the hazardwarning flashers will flash twice.When deactivated, the hazardwarning flashers will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must beplaced in the OFF and ONposition again between eachsettings change.

Lockout ProtectionWhen locking is requested with thedriver door open and the key in theignition, all the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.



Doors

Sliding DoorFrom the outside:

To open, pull the handle and slidethe door toward the rear of thevehicle until the door clicks into thedetent.

To close, pull the handle again. Thedoor will release from the openposition and slide closed.

From the inside:

To open, pull the handle toward therear of the vehicle and slide thedoor until it clicks into the detent.

To close, pull the handle toward therear of the vehicle. The door willrelease from the open position andslide closed.

Make sure the door is completelyclosed before driving away.

Back Doors

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.



To open the passenger side backdoor from the outside, pull thehandle and open until it stops.

To open the driver side back door,pull the latch release at the insideedge of the door.

To close the back doors, close thedriver side back door first. Thenclose the passenger side back door.Check to make sure both doors arecompletely closed.

The back doors open fully toapproximately 180°. To open eitherdoor to the wide open position, openboth doors normally.

Pull the 180° release latch locatedon the inside of each back door torelease the check link arm. Openthe door slowly until it stops.

{ Caution

Do not operate the 180° releaselatch until the door has been fullyopened. Doing so can result indamage to the vehicle and/ormalfunction of the mechanism.

Always look before fully openingthe back doors to avoid anaccident with oncoming traffic orpedestrians.

When closing the back doors, besure to close the left-side doorbefore closing the right-side door.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle may have a securitysystem.

The security light shows the statusof the system.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Close the windows. The systemwill arm with open windows.

Turn off the vehicle and removethe key.

2. Close all the doors and lock thevehicle in one of three ways:. Use the key.. With the door open, press

the inside lock button andclose the door. Make surethe key is not inside thevehicle.

. Use the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

If the lock button ispressed when the doors arelocked, the lights flash twiceand the horn may beeponce to indicate the doorsare locked.

3. Confirm that the security lightcomes on. The security lightstays on for about 30 seconds.The vehicle security system isnow pre-armed.

After 30 seconds the alarm systemwill arm, and the security light willbegin to slowly flash indicating thealarm system is operating.

The system will not arm if any of thefollowing occur during the30-second pre-arm time period:. The door is unlocked with the

key, the power door lock switch,or the RKE transmitter.

. Any door is open.

. The ignition key is turned toACC or ON.

. The key is turned slowly whenlocking the door.

If the key is turned beyond thevertical position toward the unlockposition to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when thekey is removed. If the security lightfails to glow for a period of time,unlock the door once and lock itagain.



When the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system willstill arm when all doors are closedand locked and the ignition key is inthe OFF position.

Vehicle Security SystemActivation

The security system will activate asfollows:. The headlamps blink and the

horn sounds intermittently. Thealarm automatically turns offafter a period of time. The alarmwill sound if the vehicle istampered with again.

. The alarm will sound if openinga door without using the key orRKE transmitter, even if the dooris unlocked by using the insidelock knob or the power door lockswitch.

Disarming the Alarm System

Do one of the following to disarmthe alarm system or turn off thealarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the driver door usingthe key.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has an alarm system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved.

This security light blinks wheneverthe ignition is placed in LOCK, OFF,or ACC.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

If the immobilizer system ismalfunctioning, the security light willremain on while the ignition switchis placed in ON.

If the engine will not start using aregistered key:

1. Leave the ignition in ON forabout five seconds.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF orLOCK, and wait for about10 seconds.



3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine.

If the engine will not start, place thekey on a separate key ring to avoidinterference from other devices.

If the light still remains on and/or theengine will not start, see a dealer forservice. Bring all registered keysalong to the dealer.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual Mirrors

Adjust the mirrors by pressing up,down, left, or right on the sides ofthe mirror.



Power Mirrors

If equipped with power outsidemirrors, adjust by selecting the leftor right mirror (1) and then use thecontrol pad (2) to move each mirrorto the desired position.

The power mirrors will operate onlywhen the ignition is in the ACC orON position.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The mirrors can be folded inwardtoward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Defogger): Press toheat the mirrors.

An indicator light in the button lightswhen the outside heated mirrors areactivated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8-1 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorIf equipped, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons; children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the RKEtransmitter in a vehicle withchildren.

The power window controls (1) areon the front doors. The driver dooralso has a control (2) to operate thefront passenger window.

Press the switch to the first detent tolower the window. Pull to the firstdetent to raise the window. Releaseto stop at the desired position.

The switches work when the ignitionis in ON or for a period of time afterthe ignition is placed in the OFFposition. If the driver or passengerdoor is opened the power to thewindows is canceled.



Express- Up/Down

If equipped, the front windows havean express feature that allows thewindow to be raised or loweredwithout holding the switch. Press orpull the switch fully and release it toactivate the express feature. Thismode can be canceled by brieflypressing or pulling the switch.

Auto-Reverse Function

If any object is in the path of thewindow when express operation isactive, the window stops at theobstacle and auto-reverses to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icing alsocause the window to auto-reverse.The window returns to normaloperation once the obstacle orcondition is removed.

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, or isnot working, the auto-reversefunction may not operate properly.If this occurs, see “Programming thePower Windows” later in thissection.

{ Warning

There are some small distancesimmediately before the closedposition which cannot bedetected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands,etc., inside the vehicle beforeclosing the window.

Window Lockout

When the window lockout button (1)is pressed, only the driver sidewindow can be opened or closed.Press again to cancel the windowlockout function.



Programming the PowerWindows

If the power window automaticfunction (closing only) does notoperate properly, perform thefollowing procedure to reprogramthe windows:

To program each front window:

1. With the ignition in ON or ACC/ACCESSORY, close all doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

If the power window automaticfunction does not operate properlyafter performing this procedure, seeyour dealer.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-13Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-17When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-29

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-37Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Securing Child Restraints . . . . 3-42


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

For adjustable head restraints

Adjust the head restraint/headrestso the center is level with the centerof your ears. If your ear position isstill higher than the recommendedalignment, place the head restraintat the highest position.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on the top of theseatback and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.



Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

{ Warning

If the head restraints are removedfor any reason, they should besecurely stored to prevent themfrom causing injury to passengersor damage to the vehicle in caseof sudden braking or an accident.

Use the following procedure toremove the head restraint:

1. Pull the head restraint up to thehighest position.

2. Press and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint fromthe seat.

4. Store the head restraint properlyin a secure place so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust thehead restraint before anoccupant uses the seatingposition.

Use the following procedure toreinstall the head restraint.

1. Align the head restraint stalkswith the holes in the seat. Makesure that the head restraint isfacing the correct direction. Thestalk with the notch (notches)must be installed in the hole withthe lock knobs.

2. Push and hold the lock knob andpush the head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the headrestraint before an occupantuses the seating position.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.



To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.

To lift the seat, pull up or push downthe lever to adjust the seat.

Lumbar Adjustment

On the driver seat, move the leveron the inboard side of the seatforward or rearward.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could cause

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the side ofthe seat.



2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Front Seat Armrest

There is an armrest on the inboardside of the driver seat. To raise orlower the armrest, push up or pulldown on the armrest.

Folding SeatbackThe front passenger seatback mayfold flat.

{ Warning

If you fold the seatback forward tocarry longer objects, such as skis,be sure any such cargo is notnear an airbag. In a crash, aninflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. Thiscould cause severe injury or evendeath. Secure objects away fromthe area in which an airbag wouldinflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3-17 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

{ Warning

Things you put on this seatbackcan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.Remove or secure all itemsbefore driving.

{ Caution

Folding a seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a seat.

To fold the seatback:

1. Lower the head restraint all theway. See Head Restraints onpage 3-2.

2. Move the seat as far back aspossible. See Seat Adjustmenton page 3-3.



3. Lift the lever fully and fold theseatback forward until itdisengages.

4. Lift the latch on the inboard sideof the seatback to releasethe seat.

5. Fold the seatback flat over theseat cushion.

To raise the seatback:

1. Raise the seatback and push itrearward.

2. Pull up on the recline lever andlean the seatback to the uprightseating position. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3-4.



{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-9.



Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-30 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-32.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.



There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt

would apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.



2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of thepassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-13.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”

later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The belt

should be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-9.

To adjust, pull out the adjustmentbutton (1) and move the heightadjuster (2) to the desired positionso the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should beaway from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button (1) tolock the shoulder belt heightadjuster into position.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, make sure it islocked in place. Try to move theheight adjuster up or down withoutpulling out on the button (1).

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during certain types of frontalcrashes if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met.Safety belt pretensioners can alsohelp tighten the safety belts in aside crash or rollover event.

When a pretensioner activates,smoke is released and a loud noisemay be heard. This smoke is notharmful and does not indicate a fire.



This could cause breathingproblems for people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andthe vehicle's safety belt system willprobably need other new parts. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3-14.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer



to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-9.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-14.

Safety Belt Care. To clean the safety belt webbing,

apply a mild soap solution or anysolution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpet.Then, wipe with a cloth andallow the safety belts to dry inthe shade. Do not allow thesafety belts to retract until theyare completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulderbelt guide of the safety beltanchors, the safety belts mayretract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see thatthe safety belt and the metalcomponents, such as buckles,tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly.If loose parts, deterioration, cuts,or other damage on the webbingis found, the entire safety beltassembly should be replaced.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-9.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger.

All of the airbags have the wordSRS AIRBAG on the trim or on alabel near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word SRSAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the front outboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word SRS AIRBAG ison the side of the seatback closestto the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word SRSCURTAIN AIRBAG is at the top ofthe pillar behind the front seats.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-18.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to any

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-30 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-32.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-9.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driverand front outboard passenger are inthe trim above the side windows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-15. Airbags are designed toinflate when the ignition is in the ONposition and the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in higher severity frontalcollisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type ofcollision are similar to those of ahigher severity frontal impact, tohelp reduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's or

front outboard passenger's headand chest. Frontal airbags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.

Depending upon sensor input andcrash severity, it is possible thatonly one frontal airbag may inflateduring a crash.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity andsafety belt usage.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

{ Warning

. The front airbags ordinarilywill not inflate in the event ofa side impact, rear impact,rollover, or lower severityfrontal collision. Always wearyour safety belt to help

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

reduce the risk or severity ofinjury in various kinds ofaccidents.

. The front passenger airbagwill not inflate if thepassenger airbag statusindicator is lit or if the frontpassenger seat isunoccupied. For moreinformation, see PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-10.

. The safety belts and the frontairbags are most effectivewhen you are sitting wellback and upright in the seatwith both feet on the floor.The front airbags inflate withgreat force. Even with theadvanced airbag system,if you are unrestrained,leaning forward, sittingsideways, or out of position in

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

any way, you are at greaterrisk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receiveserious or fatal injuries fromthe front airbag if you are upagainst it when it inflates.Always sit back against theseatback and as far away aspractical from the steeringwheel or instrument panel.Always use the safety belts.

. The driver and frontpassenger safety belt bucklesare equipped with sensorsthat detect if the safety beltsare fastened. The advancedairbag system monitors theseverity of a collision andsafety belt usage, theninflates the airbags asneeded. Failure to properlywear the safety belts canincrease the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. The front passenger seat isequipped with a PassengerSensing System (weightsensor) that turns the frontpassenger airbag off undersome conditions. This sensoris only used in this seat.Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the safety beltcan increase the risk orseverity of injury in anaccident. For moreinformation, see PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-10.

. Keep hands on the outside ofthe steering wheel. Placingthem inside the steeringwheel rim could increase therisk that they are injuredwhen the front airbag inflates.

{ Warning

Front seat-mounted side impactairbags and roof-rail rolloverairbags:

. The seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-railairbags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a frontalimpact, rear impact, or lowerseverity side collision. Alwayswear your safety belts to helpreduce the risk or severity ofinjury in various kinds ofaccidents.

. The safety belts, theseat-mounted side impactairbags, and roof-rail airbagsare most effective when youare sitting with both feet onthe floor. The seat-mountedside impact airbags androof-rail airbags inflate withgreat force. Do not allowanyone sitting in the seats to

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

extend their hand out of thewindow or lean againstthe door.

. Do not use seat covers onthe seatbacks. They mayinterfere with seat-mountedside impact airbag inflation.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-17.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in thefront outboard seating positions.The rollover capable roof-railairbags are designed to help reducethe risk of full or partial ejection inrollover events, although no systemcan prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion is

not toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-18.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-17.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not



prevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some new

parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystem

{ Warning

The front passenger airbag isdesigned to automatically turn offunder some conditions. Read thissection carefully to learn how itoperates. Proper use of the seat,safety belt, and child restraints isnecessary for most effectiveprotection. Failure to follow allinstructions in this manualconcerning the use of seats,safety belts, and child restraintscan increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

The vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicator isunder the climate controls.

After the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the passengerairbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will light for about

seven seconds. When the systemcheck is complete, the word OFFand the symbol for off will be visibleif the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is turned off and thefront outboard passenger seat isoccupied. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-10.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag, undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.If the front outboard passenger seatis unoccupied, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will not remain lit,and the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag will be turned off.



{ Warning

To ensure proper operation of thepassenger’s advanced airbagsystem, observe the followingitems:

. Do not place heavy loadsheavier than 1 kg (2.2 lb) onthe seatback, in theunderseat storage bin, headrestraint, or in the seatbackpocket.

. Do not store luggage behindthe seat that can press intothe seatback.

. If a forward-facing childrestraint is installed in thepassenger seat, do notposition the passenger seatso the child restraint contactsthe instrument panel. If thechild restraint does contactthe instrument panel, thesystem may determine theseat is occupied and the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger airbag may deployin a collision. Also, thepassenger airbag statusindicator may not light. Formore information, seeSecuring Child Restraints onpage 3-42 for informationabout installing and usingchild restraints.

. Confirm the operatingcondition with the passengerairbag status indicator.

. If you notice that thepassenger airbag statusindicator light is not operatingas described in this section,take your vehicle to yourdealer to check thepassenger sensing system.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in a correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Rear-facing child restraints shouldnot be transported in the vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the vehicle.

If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the vehicle,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facingchild restraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. The front outboard passengerseat is occupied by a smallerperson, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will not be lit.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on,or flashes, it means thatsomething may be wrong with theairbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5-9 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

If the Off Indicator Is Not Lit fora Child Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the off indicator is not lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints onpage 3-42.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the off indicator is stillnot lit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion. Also makesure the child restraint is nottrapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the off indicator is still not lit, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle and check with your dealer.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.



2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the offindicator is not lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

ride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or other

aftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

{ Warning

. Do not place any objects onthe steering wheel pad or onthe instrument panel. Also, donot place any objectsbetween any occupant andthe steering wheel or

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

instrument panel. Suchobjects may becomedangerous projectiles andcause injury if the frontairbags inflate.

. Do not place objects withsharp edges on the seat.Also, do not place heavyobjects on the seat that willleave permanent impressionsin the seat. Such objects candamage the seat orpassenger sensing systemsensors (weight sensors).This can affect the operationof the airbag system andresult in serious personalinjury.

. Do not use water or acidiccleaners (hot steam cleaners)on the seat. This can damagethe seat or passengersensing system sensors. This

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can also affect the operationof the airbag system andresult in serious personalinjury.

. Immediately after inflation,several front airbag systemcomponents will be hot. Donot touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changesshould be made to anycomponents or wiring of thesupplemental airbag system.This is to prevent accidentalinflation of the supplementalairbag or damage to thesupplemental airbag system.

. Do not make unauthorizedchanges to your vehicle’selectrical system, suspensionsystem, or front end

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

structure. This could affectproper operation of the frontairbag system.

. Tampering with the frontairbag system may result inserious personal injury.Tampering includes changesto the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly byplacing material over thesteering wheel pad andabove the instrument panel,or by installing additional trimmaterial around the airbagsystem.

. Removing or modifying thefront passenger seat mayaffect the function of theairbag and result in seriouspersonal injury.

. Modifying or tampering withthe front passenger seat mayresult personal injury. For

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

example, do not change thefront seats by placingmaterial on the seat cushionor by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers,on the seat that are notspecifically designed toassure proper airbagoperation. Additionally, do notstow any objects under thefront passenger seat or theseat cushion and seatback.Such objects may interferewith the proper operation ofthe passenger sensingsystem sensor (weightsensor).

. No unauthorized changesshould be made to anycomponents or wiring of thesafety belt system. This mayaffect the front airbag system.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Tampering with the safety beltsystem may result in seriouspersonal injury.

. Work on and around the frontairbag system should bedone by your dealer.Installation of electricalequipment should also bedone by your dealer. Thesupplemental airbag systemwiring harnesses should notbe modified or disconnected;airbag wiring harnessconnectors are yellow andorange for easy identification.Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probingdevices should not be usedon the airbag system.

. A cracked windshield shouldbe replaced immediately by aqualified repair facility.A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of thesupplemental airbag system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to three minutes after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, any of the airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly

turning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-22.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-43 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-9.



{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-17. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-9.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, return to the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Never leave children unattendedin a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safetybelts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided by



appropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the frontoutboard seat. If you must securea forward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be



sure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

{ Warning

If a booster seat and safety beltare not used properly, the risk ofa child being injured in a suddenstop or collision greatly increases:

. Make sure the shoulderportion of the belt is awayfrom the child’s face and neckand the lap portion of the beltdoes not cross the stomach.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Make sure the shoulder beltis not behind the child orunder the child’s arm.

. A booster seat must only beinstalled in a seating positionthat has a lap/shoulder belt.

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Booster seats of various sizes areoffered by several manufacturers.When selecting any booster seat,keep the following points in mind:. Choose only a booster seat with

a label certifying that it complieswith Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.



. Check the booster seat in yourvehicle to be sure it iscompatible with the vehicle’sseat and safety belt system.

. Make sure the child’s head willbe properly supported by thebooster seat or vehicle seat. Theseatback must be at or abovethe center of the child’s ears. Forexample, if a low back boosterseat is chosen, the vehicleseatback must be at or abovethe center of the child’s ears.If the seatback is lower than thecenter of the child’s ears, a highback booster seat shouldbe used.

. If the booster seat is compatiblewith your vehicle, place the childin the booster seat and checkthe various adjustments to besure the booster seat iscompatible with the child.Always follow all recommendedprocedures.

All U.S. states and Canadianprovinces or territories require thatinfants and small children be

restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while thevehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section applyto booster seat installation in thefront passenger seat. See “Securinga Booster Seat” under SecuringChild Restraints on page 3-42.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.



In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerfrontal airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontpassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-22 for additionalinformation.



When securing a child restraint inthe front outboard passenger seat,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)Some child restraints have a LATCHsystem. As part of the LATCHsystem, your child restraint mayhave lower attachments and/or a toptether. The LATCH system can helphold the child restraint in place

during driving or in a crash. Somevehicles have lower and/or toptether anchors designed to secure achild restraint with lowerattachments and/or a top tether.

Your vehicle does not have loweranchors to accommodate lowerattachments. Your vehicle doeshave a top tether anchor. If yourchild restraint has a top tether, makesure your child restraint is properlyinstalled using the top tether anchorand the vehicle's safety belt. A childrestraint must never be installedusing only the top tether andanchor. Refer to your child restraintinstructions and see Securing ChildRestraints on page 3-42 forinstructions on securing your childrestraint using the vehicle's safetybelts.

In order to use the top tetheranchors in your vehicle, you need achild restraint equipped with a toptether. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its top tether. The

following explains how to attach achild restraint with the top tether inyour vehicle.

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (1, 3) secures the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or inan accident.



The child restraint may have asingle tether (1) or a dual tether (3).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Top Tether Anchor Location

Front Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchor.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchor, there is a top tether anchorsymbol on the seatback.

Top Tether Anchor

1. Top Tether2. Top Tether Anchor

The top tether anchor is on the frontpassenger seatback.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor.

Securing a Child Restraint UsingTop Tether Anchor

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors or withthe safety belt, the child restraintwill not be able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash, the childcould be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor,but it cannot do this if it iswrapped around a child’s neck.If the shoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck,the only way to loosen the belt isto cut it.

Buckle any unused safety beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,and tighten the belt behind thechild restraint after the childrestraint has been installed.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Since this vehicle does not havea rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint shouldnot be installed in your vehicle,even if the airbag is off.


The vehicle has a front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and apassenger sensing system. Thepassenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontpassenger frontal airbag when aninfant in a rear-facing infant seat ora small child in a forward-facingchild restraint or booster seat isdetected. See “Securing ChildRestraints (Front Passenger Seat)”later in this section and PassengerSensing System on page 3-22 forimportant safety information and



additional information on installing achild restraint in the front passengerposition.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

1. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach the toptether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

1.1. Find the top tether anchor.

1.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether under theheadrest or head restraintand in between theheadrest or head restraintposts.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

2. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. Refer toyour child restraint manufacturerinstructions.

See “Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under HeadRestraints on page 3-2 forinformation on removing a headrestraint to fit a child restraint.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child RestraintsThis vehicle has airbags. Inaddition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-22 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-10 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, no system is fail-safe. Noone can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under someunusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.


If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the vehicle,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)


Rear-facing child restraints shouldnot be installed in the vehicle, evenif the airbag is off.

If a child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-38 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

Securing a Forward-Facing ChildRestraint

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure a forward-facing childrestraint in this position, follow theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and the followinginstructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicleunless the passenger seat isunoccupied. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-10.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. It may behelpful to use your knee to pushdown on the child restraint orbooster seat as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatStep 5 and 6.

7. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started unlessthe passenger seat is unoccupied.

If a child restraint has been installedand the off indicator is not lit, see “Ifthe Off Indicator Is Not Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3-22.



To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Securing a Booster Seat

{ Warning

Do not use the child restraintlocking feature when using abooster seat with the safety belts.

Follow these steps to install abooster seat in the frontpassenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seatin the front seat, move the seatto the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on theseat. Only place it in afront-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should bepositioned on the vehicle seat sothat it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or removethe head restraint to obtain thecorrect booster seat fit. If thehead restraint is removed, storeit in a secure place. Be sure toreinstall the head restraint whenthe booster seat is removed. Formore information, see HeadRestraints on page 3-2 for headrestraint adjustment, removal,and installation information.

If the seating position does nothave an adjustable headrestraint and it is interfering withthe proper booster seat fit, try adifferent booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of thesafety belt low and snug on thechild’s hips. Be sure to follow thebooster seat manufacturer’sinstructions for adjusting thesafety belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion ofthe safety belt toward theretractor to take up the extraslack. Be sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow thebooster seat manufacturer’sinstructions for adjusting thesafety belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions,and instructions for properlyfastening a safety belt. SeeLap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-10.

7. If the booster seat is installed inthe front passenger seat, placethe ignition switch in the ONposition. The passenger airbagstatus indicator may or may notbe lit, depending on the size ofthe child and the type of boosterseat being used. For moreinformation, see PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5-10.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

Underseat Storage

There is storage under the frontpassenger seat. Lift the end of thetray and pull it forward to open.Push it in toward the seat to close.

To remove the tray, pull to the pointof resistance and lift up and pull.

{ Caution

To avoid damaging the tray underthe seat, cargo should not exceed1.8 kg (4 lb).


4-2 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

There are six cargo tie-downs in thecargo area that can be used tosecure cargo.

Do not apply a total load of morethan 5 000 N (1,124 lb) to a singlecargo tie-down when securingcargo. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

{ Warning

The child restraint top tether strapmay be damaged by contact withitems in the cargo area. Your childcould be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the top tether strapis damaged. Properly secure allcargo.

{ Warning

Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop orcollision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury. Usesuitable ropes or straps to securecargo.

{ Warning

Never allow anyone to ride in thecargo area. It is extremelydangerous to ride in the cargoarea of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injuredor killed.

Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in thevehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-9Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . 5-9Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 5-11MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Overdrive Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Traction Control System(TCS)/Electronic StabilityControl Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-18Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19Low Washer Fluid WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Vehicle MessagesFuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-20Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Trip ComputerTrip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization (Radiowith Touchscreen Only) . . . . 5-21


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio and Bluetooth® controls(if equipped) can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

SOURCE: Press to changebetween AM, FM, CD, and AUXdevices.

g ord (Tuning): While in one ofthe preset radio station banks, pressand hold for less than 1.5 secondsto change to the previous or nextpreset radio station or press to go tothe previous or next track on a CD.

Press and hold for more than1.5 seconds to change to theprevious or next radio station.

Press to change the Bluetoothsystem language. See “Choosing aLanguage” in Bluetooth onpage 7-10.

V (End Call): If equipped, pressand hold to end a call or rejecta call.

gV (Press to Talk): If equipped,press to interact with Bluetooth oranswer an incoming call. SeeBluetooth on page 7-10.

x − or x + (Volume): Press x − todecrease volume or press x + toincrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition in the ON position,move the windshield wiper leverdown to select the wiper speed.

HI (High): Use for fast wipes.

LO (Low): Use for slow wipes.



INT (Intermittent Wipes): Use forintermittent wipes. To adjust wipefrequency, turn the INT TIME bandforward for less frequent wipes orrearward for more frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

MIST: For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever up.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-22.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.See Washer Fluid on page 10-18 forinformation on filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

ClockSet the clock with the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON.

Radio without Navigation

To set the clock:

1. Press and hold CLOCK on theradio faceplate until the clockdisplay flashes.

2. Pressr SEEK/TRACKq toset the hour.

3. Press Q TUNE/FF-REW/

FOLDER R to set the minutes.

4. Press CLOCK to exit or let thedisplay time out.



Radio with Navigation

To set the clock:

1. PressB MENU on the radiofaceplate.

2. Select8 Settings - System -Clock Settings.

Time Format

Select to change between 12 hoursand 24 hours clock.

Date Format

Select the desired format.

Clock Mode

Select between Auto and Manual.If Auto is selected, the clock isautomatically updated through theGlobal Positioning System (GPS).If Manual is selected, see “SetClock Manually” following.

Select “Time Zone” to have the timeset to a specific time, see “TimeZone” following.

Set Clock Manually

Press − or + to change any of thesettings for Hour, Minute, Day,Month, and Year.

Daylight Savings Time

Select to turn on and off.

Time Zone

This feature is only available ifselected in Clock Mode.

Select the desired setting.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or an MP3player.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets:. Near the bottom of the center

stack.. On the rear of the center floor

console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

The outlets are rated at 12 volt,120W (10A) maximum.



{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum12 volt, 120W (10A) rating.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-41.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped with a cigarette lighter,to heat push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready for use, it willpop back out by itself.

Do not use the lighter to plug inaccessory devices. Use the poweroutlets provided.

{ Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let thelighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysIf equipped with a removableashtray, it can be placed into thefront floor console cupholder. Openthe cover to use.

{ Caution

If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster



1. Tachometer2. Speedometer3. Trip Odometer Reset Stem4. Instrument Brightness Control5. Transmission Position

Indicator6. Odometer/Trip Computer7. Fuel Gauge

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

Press the trip odometer reset stemon the cluster to switch between theodometer, trip odometer A, and tripodometer B.

To reset each trip odometer to zero,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem. Only the trip odometerthat is currently displayed will bereset.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, andthe damage would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the rpm’sin the warning area.

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel is left when the ignition isturned to ON.

When the tank nears empty, the lowfuel warning light may come on orthe segments of the gauge mayblink. There is still a little fuel left,but the vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon. See Low Fuel WarningLight on page 5-18.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle onwhich the fuel door is located.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The indicator moves a little whenturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Safety Belt Reminders

The light and chime remind you tofasten your safety belts. The lightilluminates when the ignition isplaced in ON or START and remainsilluminated until the driver’s safetybelt is fastened. At the same time,the chime sounds for aboutsix seconds unless the driver’ssafety belt is securely fastened.

The safety belt warning light mayalso illuminate if the frontpassenger’s safety belt is notfastened when the front passengerseat is occupied. Forseven seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in ON, the systemdoes not activate the warning lightfor the front passenger.

{ Warning

If the safety belt warning lightstays on continuously while theignition is turned ON with alldoors closed and all safety beltsfastened, it may indicate amalfunction in the system. Havethe system checked by yourdealer.

See Safety Belts on page 3-8.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-15.



The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson or comes on and flashes afterthe vehicle is started or comes onwhile driving, it means the airbagsystem might not be workingproperly. The airbags in thevehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator

{ Warning

The front passenger airbag isdesigned to automatically turn offunder some conditions. Read thissection carefully to learn how itoperates. Proper use of the seat,safety belt, and child restraints isnecessary for most effectiveprotection. Failure to follow allinstructions in this manualconcerning the use of seats,safety belts, and child restraintscan increase the risk or severityof injury in an accident.

The passenger airbag statusindicator is under the climatecontrols.



After the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the passengerairbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will light for aboutseven seconds and then go out orstay lit depending on the frontoutboard seat occupied status. Thepassenger airbag status indicatoroperates as follows:. Passenger seat occupied by a

small adult, child, or childrestraint: The passenger airbagstatus indicator lights to indicatethat the front passenger frontalairbag is off and will not inflate ina collision.

. Occupied passenger seat andthe passenger meets theconditions outlined in thismanual: The passenger airbagstatus indicator is not lit toindicate that the front passengerfrontal airbag is operational.

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-22 for more information.

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, and theengine is not running, as a check toshow it is working.

It should go out when the engine isstarted. If it stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery. If a shortdistance must be driven with thelight on, turn off all accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner, to help reduce the drainon the battery.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-14 formore information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the



OBD II system has detected aproblem and diagnosis and servicemight be required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame size and type as theoriginals can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions and

could damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Do not drive at speeds above

72 km/h (45 mph). Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.



The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-38. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Fuel on page 9-37.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON whilethe engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This can



happen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turned toON. If it does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake on page 9-24. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal might go closer to thefloor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, check the brakefluid level and have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing theVehicle on page 10-58.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

Metric English

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still has

brakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-14.

Overdrive Off Light

This light comes on when theoverdrive is turned off.

See Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) on page 9-18.

Power Steering WarningLight

If equipped, this light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON as a check to show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

{ Warning

. If the engine is not running oris turned off while driving, thepower assist for the steeringwill not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

. When the power steeringwarning light illuminates withthe engine running, there will

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

be no power assist for thesteering. You will still havecontrol of the vehicle but thesteering will be harder tooperate. Have the powersteering system checked byyour dealer.

When the power steering warninglight illuminates with the enginerunning, there will be no powerassist for the steering but you willstill have control of the vehicle. Atthis time, greater steering effort isrequired to operate the steeringwheel, especially in sharp turns andat low speeds.

Traction Control System(TCS)/Electronic StabilityControl Light

If equipped, the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) or TCS indicator/warning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the ESCsystem have been disabled.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theESC system is actively working.


Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when the ESCsystem is turned off. If ESC is off,the Traction Control System (TCS)is also off.

If the ESC and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS andthe ESC systems and the warninglight turns off.




Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light goes off.

{ Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Drivingwith this light on can damage theengine and it may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. SeeEngine Overheating onpage 10-16.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens, pull over and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10-35.



When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-37.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The low fuel warning light maycome on when the fuel tank is lowon fuel. When fuel is added, thelight should go off. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

On some vehicles, the segments ofthe fuel gauge may flash as a lowfuel indicator.



Security Light

This light is used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash to indicate the systemis armed.

If this light stays on when theignition is in ON, the system needsservice.

See Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2-10 and ImmobilizerOperation on page 2-11.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-1 for moreinformation.

Low Washer FluidWarning Light

If equipped, the low washer fluidwarning light comes on when thewindshield washer fluid is low. SeeWasher Fluid on page 10-18.

Cruise Control Light

The CRUISE light comes on whenthe cruise control is on.

See Cruise Control on page 9-28 formore information.

Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.



Vehicle Messages

Fuel System Messages

LOOSE FUEL CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap, then press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to reset themessage.

Tire Messages

CHECK TIRE PRES (Pressure)

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-17. If atire pressure message appears,stop as soon as you can. Have thetire pressures checked and set tothose shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10-26, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-35.

Trip ComputerThe vehicle may have a tripcomputer. It provides the driver withdriving information such as thedriving distance for the remainingfuel, instant fuel economy, andaverage fuel economy.

1. Trip Odometer Reset Stem2. Trip Computer Display

The trip odometer reset stem isused to cycle through the availabletrip computer displays. All of thedisplays except Trip A and Distanceto Empty can be reset by pressingand holding the trip odometer resetstem for more than three seconds.



Trip A or Trip B

See Trip Odometer on page 5-8.

Instant Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximatefuel economy at any given moment.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage fuel economy since the lasttime it was reset.

Distance to Empty

This display shows an estimateddistance that the vehicle can bedriven before refueling.

When the fuel level is low, thedisplay will automatically show thedistance to empty display and thenumbers will flash. When the fuellevel is even lower, (– – – –) isdisplayed.

Outside Temperature (IfEquipped)

On some vehicles, the outsidetemperature can be displayed.

VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(Radio withTouchscreen Only)Use the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Infotainment System AudioControls

Using the Faceplate

BACK. Press to exit a menu.. Press to return to a previous

screen.

Using the Touch Screen

Press a screen feature to:. View more feature options.. Enable or disable the feature.

Q : Press to scroll up.

R : Press to scroll down.

To access thepersonalization menu:

1. Press INFO on the faceplate,then select8 Settings on theHome page.

2. Select the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

3. Select the desired featuresetting.

Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:

. e Audio

. I System



. n Navigation

. H Traffic

. G Phone & Bluetooth

. J SXM

Each menu is detailed in thefollowing information.

e Audio

See “Audio Settings” in “AM-FMRadio” in the infotainment manual.

I System

Select and the following maydisplay:. Display. Clock Settings. Language. Camera Settings. Temperature Unit. Touchscreen Click. System Beeps

. Return to Factory Settings/ClearMemory

. Software Licenses

Display

Select and the following maydisplay:. Brightness. Display Mode. Scroll Direction

Brightness

This feature adjusts the brightnessof the display.

Select Very Bright, Bright, Default,Dark, or Very Dark.

Display Mode

This feature adjusts the display tomake it easier to see due to thelighting in the vehicle.

Select Automatic, Day, or Night.

Scroll Direction

This feature changes what directionthe menus scroll on the screen.

Select Up or Down.

Clock Settings

See Clock on page 5-3.

Language

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

Camera Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Display Mode. Brightness. Contrast. Color

Display Mode

This feature changes the displaymode of the rear view camera..

Select Automatic, Day, or Night.



Brightness

This feature adjusts the brightnessof the display.

Select − or + to change the setting.

Contrast

This feature adjusts the contrast ofthe display.


Color

This feature adjusts the color of thedisplay.


Temperature Unit

Select to change the temperatureunit reading between celsius andfahrenheit.

Touchscreen Click

When on, a click sound will beheard when a key on the screen istouched.

Select ON or OFF.

System Beeps

When on, a beep sound will beheard when a pop-up messageappears on the screen or afaceplate button is pressed and heldfor two seconds.

Select ON or OFF.

Return to Factory Settings/ClearMemory

Select to return all settings todefault and to clear the memory.

Select Yes or No.

Software Licenses

Select to view software licenseinformation.

n Navigation

See “Navigation” in the infotainmentmanual.

H Traffic

See “H Traffic” in theinfotainment manual.

G Phone & Bluetooth

See “Bluetooth” in the infotainmentmanual.

J SXM

See “SXM Settings” in “AM-FMRadio” in the infotainment manual.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-2Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever on the left side ofthe steering column.

There are three positions:

OFF: Turns all the lamps off,except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition isoff and the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever away from you and release, toturn the high beams on. To return tolow beams, push the lever again orpull it toward you and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.


6-2 Lighting

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal to thevehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or in thelow‐beam position, pull the turnsignal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON

position.. The exterior lamp control is in

the OFF position.. The parking brake is released.

If the parking brake is appliedbefore the engine is started, theDRL do not come on.

When the DRL are on, only thelow-beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

Turn the exterior lamp control tothe; or5 position for fullillumination when driving at night.

The DRL remain on until the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position.

Hazard Warning Flashers

The hazard warning switch is on thecenter stack below the climatecontrol system.

Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble. Press again toturn the flashers off.

The hazard warning flashers workwith the ignition switch in anyposition.

Some localities may prohibit the useof the hazard warning flashers whiledriving.


Lighting 6-3

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse. See ElectricalSystem Overload on page 10-24.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The instrument panel illuminationcontrol only works if the exteriorlamp control is in the5 or;position.

The knob for this feature is on theinstrument cluster.

Press the knob to adjust thebrightness of the instrument panellights.


6-4 Lighting

Cargo Lamp

The interior light switch has twopositions and operates in anyignition switch position.

ON: Turns the interior light on inany door position. The light turns offautomatically after a period of timeunless the ignition switch is turnedto ACC/ACCESSORY or ON.

OFF: Turns the interior light off andit will not come on regardless of thedoor position.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp in the overheadconsole operates in any ignitionswitch position.

The dome lamp switch has threepositions. Press the switch to adjustthe settings.

Press (1) to turn the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

When the switch is in the (2)position, the lamp comes on when adoor is opened. When the domelamp is in this position, the lightstays on for a period of time when:. The doors are unlocked while all

the doors are closed and theignition switch is in the OFFposition.

. The driver door is opened andthen closed while the key isremoved from the ignition switch.

. The key is removed from theignition switch while all doors areclosed.

The dome lamp turns off while thetimer is activated when:. The driver door is locked by the

key or the power door lockswitch.

. The ignition switch is placed inthe ON position.

Press (3) to turn the lamp on.


Lighting 6-5

The light turns off after a period oftime unless the ignition switch is putin the ACC/ACCESSORY or ONposition.

The light turns off automatically aftera period of time while the doors areopen to prevent the battery frombecoming discharged.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps on theoverhead console.

Press (1) to turn the reading lampon or (2) to turn the readinglamp off.

Lighting Features

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverIf the ignition is turned off and theparking lamps or headlamps havebeen left on, they will automaticallyturn off after a period of time. Thisprotects against draining the battery.


6-6 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Introduction

InfotainmentBase radio information is included inthis manual. See the infotainmentmanual for information on otheravailable infotainment systems.

Read the following pages tobecome familiar with these features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road fortoo long or too often while usingany infotainment feature cancause a crash. You or otherscould be injured or killed. Do notgive extended attention toinfotainment tasks while driving.Limit your glances at the vehicledisplays and focus your attentionon driving. Use voice commandswhenever possible.

The infotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help avoiddistraction by disabling somefunctions when driving. Thesefunctions may gray out when theyare unavailable. Many infotainmentfeatures are also available throughthe instrument cluster and steeringwheel controls.

Before driving:. Become familiar with the

operation, faceplate buttons, andscreen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or by using a single voicecommand if equipped withBluetooth phone capability.

See Defensive Driving on page 9-2.


7-2 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview

1. > (Mute)

. Press to mute the audiosystem.

2. DISP/TEXT (Display Text). Radio: Press to view station

and song information.

. CD: Press to scroll throughtrack number, disc title, andsong title.

. CD with MP3 or WMA:Press to scroll through tracknumber, folder title, albumtitle, artist, and song title.



3. AM. Press to listen to AM

stations.

4. FM. Press to listen to FM

stations.

5. CD Slot

6. CD. Press to start playing a

loaded CD when thesystem is off.

. Press to start playing aloaded CD when listeningto another audio source.

7. AUX (Auxiliary). Press to play a connected

auxiliary device.

8. CLOCK. Press to turn the clock

display off and on when theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/START.

. Press and hold to set theclock. See Clock onpage 5-3.

9. X (Eject)

. Press to eject theloaded CD.

10. r SEEK/TRACKq

. Pressr SEEK to seekthe next station or nextCD track. Pressrepeatedly to go forwardseveral tracks.

. Press TRACKq to seekthe previous station orstart the current CD trackfrom the beginning. Pressrepeatedly to go backseveral tracks.

11. RDM (Random). CD: Press to change the

playing pattern of the CDbetween Disc Randomand Disc Repeat.

. CD with MP3 or WMA:Press to change theplaying pattern of the CDbetween Disc Random,Folder Random, and DiscRepeat.

12. RPT (Repeat). CD: Press to change the

playing pattern of the CDbetween Track Repeatand Disc Repeat.

. CD with MP3 or WMA:Press to change theplaying pattern of the CDbetween Folder Repeat,Track Repeat, and DiscRepeat.

13. SCAN. Press to scan the next

radio station forfive seconds. Press thebutton again within thefive seconds and the radiowill stay on that station.



14. PUSH/PWR (Power). Press to turn the

infotainment system onor off.

15. VOL (Volume). Turn to adjust the volume.

16. Buttons 1–6. Save and select favorite

stations.

17. Auxiliary Input Jack. Use to connect external

audio devices.

18. AUDIO. Press to set the bass,

treble, fade, balance,and beep.

19. SPEED VOL. Press to change Speed

Sensitive Volume (SSV).

20. Q TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER R. Press to change to the

next or previous radiostations one at a time.

. CD: Press and hold to fastforward or fast reverse theCD track.

. CD with MP3 or WMA:Press and hold for lessthan 90 seconds tochange the folders in theCD. Press and hold formore than 90 seconds tofast forward or fastreverse the CD track.

Operation

Using the Radio

PUSH/PWR (Power): Press to turnthe system on and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume.

> (Mute): Press to mute the audiosystem. Press again to unmute theaudio system.

SPEED VOL: Speed SensitiveVolume (SSV) automatically adjuststhe radio volume to compensate for

road and wind noise as the vehiclespeed changes while driving, so thatthe volume level stays consistent.

To activate SSV:

1. Press SPEED VOL.


FOLDER R to change betweenOff, Low, Mid, and High.

3. Press AM, FM, or CD to returnto the desired option or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press AUDIO until Bass orTreble displays.


FOLDER R orr SEEK/TRACKq to adjust the selected modeto the desired setting.



Adjusting the Speakers (Fade/Balance)

The vehicle is not equipped withrear speakers. If fade is adjusted tothe rear no sound will be heard.

To adjust the fade or balance:

1. Press AUDIO until Fade orBalance displays.


FOLDER R orr SEEK/TRACKq to adjust the selected modeto the desired setting.

Menu Selection Sound (Beep)

To turn the menu selection sound onor off:

1. Press AUDIO until Beep ON/OFF displays.


FOLDER R orr SEEK/TRACKq to select ON or OFF.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Finding a Station

AM: Press to change to AMstations.

FM: Press to change to FMstations and press to changebetween FM1 and FM2. The FMstereo indicator (ST) illuminatesduring FM stereo reception. Whenthe stereo broadcast signal is weak,the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

r SEEK/TRACKq : PressrSEEK to fast seek or scan the nextstation.

Press TRACKq to fast seek orscan the previous station.

Q TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER R :Press to change to the next orprevious radio stations one ata time.

SCAN: Press to scan the nextradio station for five seconds. Pressthe button again within thefive seconds and the radio will stayon that station.

Storing a Favorite Station

Set up radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is parked.

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Select the desired radio bandAM, FM1, or FM2.

2. Tune to the desired radio station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix keys until a beep sounds.When that key is pressed andreleased, the station that wasset returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM stereo gives the best sound, butFM signals reach only about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade inand out.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the radio. Thisinterference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for AM, FM, and navigationSystem, if equipped. Tall buildings,hills, trees, heavy foliage, tunnels,bridges, and garages will affectreception. Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear reception.Make sure there is sufficientclearance when entering garages orparking structures.



Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Only use high quality 12 cm (4.7 in)round discs that have the“COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO”logo on the disc or packaging. Donot add any label to a CD. It couldget caught in the CD. If a CD isrecorded on a personal computerand a description label is needed,try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners is notadvised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

{ Caution

If a label is added to a CD, morethan one CD is inserted into theslot at a time, or an attempt ismade to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

Handle them carefully. Store CDs intheir original cases or otherprotective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CDplayer scans the bottom surface ofthe disc. Do not touch the bottomside of a CD while handling it; this

could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by the outer edges or the edgeof the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

The following CDs may not workproperly: Copy control compactdiscs (CCCD), Recordable compactdiscs (CD-R), and Rewritablecompact discs (CD-RW).

Do not use the following CDs asthey may cause the CD player tomalfunction, 8 cm (3.1 in) discs withan adapter, CDs that are not round,CDs with a paper label, CD that aredamaged, such as cracked, broken,scratched, or with abnormal edges.

Inserting a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.



Ejecting a CD

X : Press and release to eject thedisc. Remove the CD when RemoveDisc displays. If the disc is notremoved, after several seconds thedisc is automatically pulled back intothe player, but doesn’t start to play.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

CD: Press to start a loaded CD.

DISP/TEXT (Display Text): Pressto display additional informationrelated to the CD. If information isavailable, the track number, disctitle, folder title, album title, artist,and song title information willdisplay on the screen with eachpress of the button.

r SEEK/TRACKq : PressrSEEK to seek the next CD track.Press repeatedly to go forwardseveral tracks.

Press TRACKq to start thecurrent CD track from the beginning.Press repeatedly to go back severaltracks.

RDM (Random): CD: Press tochange the playing pattern of theCD between Disc Random and DiscRepeat.

CD with MP3 or WMA: Press tochange the playing pattern of theCD between Disc Random, FolderRandom, and Disc Repeat.

RPT (Repeat): CD: Press tochange the playing pattern of theCD between Track Repeat and DiscRepeat.

CD with MP3 or WMA: Press tochange the playing pattern of theCD between Folder Repeat, TrackRepeat, and Disc Repeat.

MP3-Supported Files

Radios with CD/MP3 have thecapability of playing CD, CD-R,or CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 8 kbps, 48 kbps,192 kbps,and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.



CD-R- or CD-RW-Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 255 folders.. Up to 512 files.. Up to 255 files for one folder.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

The playback order is the order inwhich the files were written by thewriting software. Therefore, the filesmay not play in the desired order.

File System and Naming

The artist/song title that displays isthe artist/song title contained in theID3 tag. The ID3 tag information isdisplayed on the artist/song title lineon the screen.

Text character limit is 128characters.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. Confirm that the CD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facingup, etc.).

. Confirm that the CD is not bentor warped and it is free ofscratches.

PRESS EJECT: This is an errordue to excessive temperature insidethe player. Remove the CD bypressingX. After a short time,

reinsert the CD. The CD can beplayed when the temperature of theplayer returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE: The file isunplayable in this audio system(only MP3 or WMA, if equipped.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

Auxiliary Jack

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The auxiliary input jack is on thelower right side of the faceplate.External devices such as an iPod®,laptop computer, MP3 player,cassette player, or CD changer canbe connected to the auxiliary portusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable.

This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.



Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9-2 formore information on driverdistraction.

VOL (Volume): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume of the portableplayer. Additional volumeadjustments might have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is not loud or soft enough.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play aportable audio device.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack. When adevice is connected, press the AUXbutton to begin playing audio fromthe device.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

Phone

BluetoothIf equipped with Bluetooth®

capability, the system can interactwith many cell phones, allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. When the vehicle is in motion,some commands may not beavailable so full attention may begiven to operating the vehicle.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section later.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons on the steeringwheel to operate the in-vehicleBluetooth system. See SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.

gV (Press to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls and startspeech recognition.

V (End): Press and hold to end acall or reject a call.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth-capable cell phone with aHands-Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON or ACC/ACCESSORY position.If the gV button on the steeringwheel is pressed before theinitialization completes, the systemwill announce “Hands-free phonesystem not ready” and will not reactto voice commands. Not all phonessupport all functions, and not allphones work with the in-vehicle

Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Choosing a Language

The available languages areEnglish, Spanish, and French.

To change the language:

1. Press and hold gV for morethan fivecseconds.

2. The system responds with,“Press the PHONE/SEND (gV)button for the hands-free phonesystem to enter the voiceadaptation mode or press thePHONE/END (V) button toselect a different language.”

3. PressV.

4. The system responds with thecurrent language and gives theoption to change to anotherlanguage. Do nothing and thesession will end afterfive seconds and the currentlanguage will remain.



5. To select a different language,pressg ord on the steeringwheel.

6. To select the language,press gV within five seconds.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For available commands for thecurrent menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone soundsafter the system responds indicatingwhen it is waiting for a voicecommand. Wait until the tone andthen speak. Start speaking acommand within 5 seconds after thetone sounds.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice withoutpausing between words.

Mute: Say to mute the call. Saymute again to unmute the call.

Audio System

When using the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's audio system speakersand overrides the audio system.Use the audio system volume knobor press x − or x + on the steeringwheel, during a call, to change thevolume level.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see



“Listing All Paired andConnected Phones” later in thissection.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Connect Phone.” Thesystem acknowledges thecommand and announces thenext set of available commands.

3. Say “Add Phone.” The systemacknowledges the command andasks you to initiate connectingfrom the phone handset.

The connecting procedure of thecell phone varies according toeach cell phone model. See thecell phone Owner’s Manual fordetails.

When prompted for a Passkeycode, enter “1234” from thehandset.

4. The system asks you to say aname for the phone.

If the name is too long or tooshort, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

If more than one phone isconnected and the name soundstoo much like a name alreadyused, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name:

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Select Phone.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

The system will list the namesassigned to each phone and thenprompt you for the phone you wishto delete. Deleting a phone from thevehicle will also delete the phonebook for that phone:

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Delete Phone.”

Replace Phone

The system will replace an existingphone pairing with a new phone.The system will keep all voice tagsassigned to your phone book.

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Replace Phone.”

Bluetooth Off

Use the Bluetooth Off command toprevent a wireless connection toyour phone.

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Bluetooth Off.”



Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:

Call: This command is used to diala stored name.

Phone Number: This commandallows a phone number to be dialedby entering the digits one at a time.

Special Number: This commandallows special characters in a phonenumber.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Call Back: This command is usedto call the last incoming phonenumber.

During a Call

During a call there are severalcommand options available. PressgV on the steering wheel to mutethe receiving voice and entercommands.

Help: The system announces theavailable commands.

Cancel or Quit: The systemannounces “Cancel,” ends thesession, and returns to the call.

Send: Use the Send command toenter numbers, “*” or “#” during acall. For example, if you weredirected to dial an extension by anautomated system, say “Send onetwo three four.”

The system acknowledges thecommand and sends the tonesassociated with the numbers. Thesystem then ends the session andreturns to the call. Say “star” for “*”and say “pound” for “#”.

Transfer call: Use the TransferCall command to transfer the callfrom the Bluetooth® Hands-FreePhone System to the cell phonewhen privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfercall. Call transferred to privacymode.” The system then ends thesession.

To reconnect the call from the cellphone to the Bluetooth Hands-FreeSystem, press the gV button.

Mute: Use this command to muteyour voice so the other party cannothear it. Use the mute commandagain to unmute your voice.

Using the “Call” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Call.”

3. Say the name you want to call.

4. The system repeats it back.If there are multiple numbersassociated with the name, thesystem asks you to choose thecorrect number.

5. Once you have confirmed thename and location, the systembegins the call.



Using the “Phone Number”Command

The Phone Number commandallows a phone number to be dialedby entering the digits one at a time.

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Call.”

3. Say “Phone Number.”

4. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After thenumber is entered, the systemrepeats it back.

5. Say “Dial.”

Using the “Special Number”Command

The Special Number commandallows for dialing more than10 digits or any special characters.

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Call.”

3. Say “Special Number.”

4. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After thenumber is entered, the systemrepeats it back.

5. Say “Dial.”

Using the “Re-dial” Command

Use the Re-dial command to call thelast number that was dialed.

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Call.”

3. Say “Re-dial.”

Using the “Call Back” Command

Use the Call Back command to dialthe number of the last incoming call.

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Call.”

3. Say “Call Back.”

Phonebook

Without Automatic Download

For phones that do not supportautomatic download of the phonebook the Phone book command isused to manually add entries to thevehicle phone book.

The phone book stores up to40 names for each phoneconnected to the system.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Transfer Entry: This command willstore a name into the system.

Delete Entry: This command willerase one entry from thephone book.

List Names: This command will listall the names in the phone book.

Using the “Transfer Entry”Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Transfer Entry.”



3. When prompted, say the newentry name.

4. The system will ask you totransfer a phone number storedin the cell phone’s memory.

5. Enter a phone number by voicecommand.

6. Say “Transfer Entry.” The systemacknowledges the command andasks you to start the transferfrom the phone handset.

7. The system repeats the numberand prompts you for the nextcommand. When you havefinished entering numbers ortransferring an entry, say “Store.”

8. The system confirms the name,location, and number.

Using the “Delete Entry”Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Delete Entry.”

3. Speak the name to delete or say“List Names” to choose an entry.

Using the “List Names” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “List Names.”

3. The system responds with a listof names from the phone book.To stop the playback of the list atany time press V.

With Automatic Download

For phones that support automaticdownload of the phone book the“Phone book” command is used tomanage phone book entries.

The phone book stores up to1,000 names for each phoneconnected to the system.

When a phone is connected to thesystem, the phone book isautomatically downloaded to thevehicle. This feature allows accessto the phone book from theBluetooth system and calls contactsby name. You can record a customvoice tag for contact names that thesystem has difficulty recognizing.See “Record name” in this section.

List Names: This command will listall the names and locations in thephone book.

Record Name: This command willrecord custom voice tags for contactnames in the phone book that thevehicle has difficulty recognizing.

Using the “List Names” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “List Names.”

3. The system responds with a listof names and locations in thephone book. To stop theplayback of the list at any timepressV.

Using the “Record Name”Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Record Name.”

This feature can also be used torecord voice tags to directly dial anentry with multiple numbers. Up to40 voice tags can be recorded tothe system.



Recent Calls

Use the Recent Calls command toaccess outgoing, incoming,or missed calls or dial numbers forthe last incoming or outgoing calls.

Outgoing: Use the Outgoingcommand to list the outgoingcalls made.

Incoming: Use the Incomingcommand to list the incomingcalls made.

Missed: Use the Missed commandto list the calls not answered.

Call Back: Use the Call Backcommand to call the last incomingphone number.

Re-dial: Use the Re-dial commandto call the last outgoing numbercalled.

Using the “Outgoing” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Outgoing.”

3. The system repeats a list of theoutgoing calls.

Using the “Incoming” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Incoming.”

3. The system repeats a list of theincoming calls.

Using the “Missed” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Missed.”

3. The system repeats a list ofmissed calls.

Using the “Call Back” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Call Back.”

3. The system calls back the lastincoming phone number.

Using the “Re-dial” Command

1. Press gV.

2. Say “Re-dial.”

3. The system calls the lastoutgoing number called.

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press gV to answer the call.

. PressV to ignore a call.

Ending a Call

PressV to end a call.

Voice Adaptation (VA) Mode

VA allows up to two out-of-dialectusers to train the system to improverecognition accuracy. By repeating anumber of commands, the userscan create a voice model of theirown voice that is stored in thesystem. The system is capable ofstoring a different voice adaptationmodel for each connected phone.

Training

To train a voice:

1. Park the vehicle in a reasonablyquiet outdoor location.



2. Sit in the driver seat with theengine running and the parkingbrake on.

3. Press and hold gV for morethan five seconds.

4. The system responds with,“Press the PHONE/SEND (gV)button for the hands-free phonesystem to enter the voiceadaptation mode or press thePHONE/END (V) button toselect a different language.” See“Language” previously in thissection.

5. Voice memory A or B isautomatically selected. If bothmemory locations are alreadyused, the system will prompt youto overwrite one. Follow theinstructions provided by thesystem.

6. When the preparation iscomplete and you are ready tobegin, press gV.

7. The VA mode will be explained.Follow the instructions providedby the system.

8. When the training is finished, thesystem will tell you that anadequate number of phraseshave been recorded.

9. The system will announce thatVA has been completed and thesystem is ready.

The VA mode will stop if:

. The gV button is pressed formore than five seconds inVA mode.

. The vehicle begins movingduring VA mode.

. The ignition switch is placed inthe OFF or LOCK position.

Manual Control

While using the voice recognitionsystem, it is possible to select menuoptions to use the steering wheelcontrols instead of speaking voicecommands. This can be especiallyhelpful if the noise of driving makesit difficult for the voice recognitionsystem to accurately interpretcommands. The manual controlmode does not allow dialing aphone number by digits. The usermay select an entry from thePhonebook or Recent Calls lists. Tore-activate voice recognition, exitthe manual control mode bypressing and holdingV, then pressgV to start the Hands Free PhoneSystem.

To start Manual Control Mode:

1. From an active Phonebook or Recent Call list,press Q TUNE/FF-REW

FOLDER R up or down.



2. The system responds with“Showing Manual Options.”

3. Browse the menu bypressing Q TUNE/FF-REW

FOLDER R up or down. Thesystem will speak the currentmenu option. Depending on theaudio display, it will also showthe current menu option.

4. Press gV to select the menuoption.

5. PressV to go back to theprevious menu.

6. Press and hold V forfive seconds to exit.

Trademarks andLicense AgreementsFCC Information

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

“Made for iPod” and “Made foriPhone” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed toconnect specifically to iPod oriPhone and has been certified bythe developer to meet Appleperformance standards.

iPod and iPhone are trademarks ofApple Computer, Inc., registered inthe U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

MaintenanceService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Climate ControlSystemsThe vehicle’s heating, cooling, andventilation can be controlled withthis system.

1. Air Delivery Mode Control

2. Outside Air/Recirculation AirIntake Control

3. Temperature Control

4. Heated Outside Mirrors (IfEquipped)

5. Rear Window Defogger (IfEquipped)

6. Fan Control

7. A/C (Air Conditioning)

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turning thefan control to 0 turns the fan off. Thefan must be turned on to run the airconditioning compressor.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.


8-2 Climate Controls

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the floor, windshield, andside window outlets.

1 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

In defrost or defog mode, excessiveair conditioning use can cause thewindows to fog. If this happens,change the air delivery mode toYand reduce the fan speed.

Move the air intake control to%orM to select the outside air orrecirculation modes.

% (Outside Air): This modepulls outside air inside the vehicle.

M (Recirculation): This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle. It canbe used to reduce the outside airand odors that may enter thevehicle.

Using the recirculation mode forextended periods may cause thewindows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.

To allow outside air to enter in theseconditions, move the air intakecontrol to%.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Turn thefan control to the desired speed andpress A/C. The air conditioning doesnot operate when the fan controlknob is in the off position. Press A/Cto turn the air conditioning on andoff. When A/C is pressed, anindicator light comes on to showthat the air conditioning is on.

For quick cool down on hot days:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. Move the air intake controltoM.

3. Press A/C.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highestA speed.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in the vehicle hascooled, move the air intake controlto%

Rear Window Defogger andHeated Outside Mirrors

N (Rear Window Defogger, IfEquipped): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on in thedisplay to show that the feature ison. This helps to clear frost from therear window and outside mirrors.The ignition must be on for thedefogger to work.


Climate Controls 8-3

The rear window defogger canbe turned off by pressing1 againor by turning the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK.

M (Heated Outside Mirrors, IfEquipped): Press to turn on or off.An indicator light comes on in thedisplay to show that the feature ison. This helps to clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror. Theignition must be in the ON positionfor the heated outside mirrorsto work.

{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject on the inside rear windowcan damage the antenna ordefogger. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not stick anything to the rearwindow.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are on the sidesand center of the instrument panel.

Open, close, or turn the slats toadjust the airflow.

Move the sliding knob to adjust theairflow.


8-4 Climate Controls

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

Maintenance

ServiceThis vehicle may have the newenvironmentally friendly refrigerant,R1234yf. This refrigerant has asignificantly reduced global warmingimpact on the environment,compared to the traditionalautomotive refrigerant, R-134a. Allvehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle.

The refrigerant system should onlybe serviced by trained and certifiedtechnicians. The air conditioningevaporator should never be repairedor replaced by one from a salvagevehicle. It should only be replacedby a new evaporator to ensureproper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerantsshould be reclaimed with properequipment. Venting refrigerantsdirectly to the atmosphere is harmfulto the environment and may alsocreate unsafe conditions based oninhalation, combustion, frostbite,or other health-based concerns.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-8Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-13Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Automatic TransmissionContinuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 9-18

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Driver Assistance SystemsParking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-38Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.



. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

Vacuum Assisted Brakes

The brake booster aids braking byusing engine vacuum. If the enginestops, you can stop the vehicle bydepressing the brake pedal.However, greater foot pressure onthe brake pedal will be required tostop the vehicle and stoppingdistance will be longer.

{ Warning

If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the powerassist for the brakes will not work.Braking will be harder.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.



If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. The Antilock Brake System(ABS) allows steering whilebraking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.



3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-26.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-25.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-22.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) which

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

cannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems.”

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-17.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-25.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-58.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center



pillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflation,see Tires on page 10-26 andTire Pressure on page 10-35.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”



Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 181 kg (400 lbs)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 1 = 68 kg(150 lbs)

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 113 kg(250 lbs)

Example 2



3. Available Cargo Weight =45 kg (100 lbs)

Example 3



3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelshows the size of the vehicle'soriginal tires and the inflationpressures needed to obtain thegross weight capacity of thevehicle. This is called GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification label also tellsyou the maximum weights forthe front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenter line.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your vehicle cancarry.



Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else –they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them as

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

far forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Also, check the tires for properinflation pressure. Refer to the Tireand Loading Information label.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines for thefirst 2 000 km (1,200 mi):

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow.

. Avoid quick starts. Avoidaccelerating at full-throttle inany gear. Do not exceed4000 rpm.

. Avoid downshifting to brakeor slow the vehicle.

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

. Avoid making hard stops.During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition lock is designed so thatthe ignition switch cannot be turnedto the LOCK position until the shiftlever is moved to the P (Park)position.. When placing the ignition switch

in the LOCK position, make surethat the shift lever is in theP (Park) position.

. When removing the key from theignition switch (if it is inserted),make sure that the shift lever isin the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot beplaced to the LOCK position:

1. Shift the shift lever to theP (Park) position.

2. Move the ignition switch slightlyin the ON direction.

3. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK position.

4. Remove the key if it is insertedin the ignition switch.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the ignition switch is placed to theLOCK position, the shift levercannot be moved from the P (Park)position.



The shift lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON positionand the foot brake pedal isdepressed.

There is an OFF position betweenthe LOCK and ACC positions. TheOFF position is indicated by a “1” onthe key cylinder.

{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

Ignition Switch Positions

LOCK (0): Normal parking position.

OFF (1): The engine can be turnedoff without locking the steeringwheel.

ACC (2): Accessories. This positionactivates electrical accessories suchas the radio when the engine is notrunning.

ON (3): Normal operating position.This position turns on the ignitionsystem and the electricalaccessories.

START (4): This position starts theengine. As soon as the engine hasstarted, release the key.It automatically returns to the ONposition.

Starting the EngineTo place the transmission in theproper gear:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-41.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park)or N (Neutral). P (Park) isrecommended.



The shift lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if theignition switch is turned to theOFF position or if the key isremoved from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not tooperate if the shift lever is in anyof the driving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your footoff the accelerator pedalbyplacing the ignition switch in theSTART position. Release thekey when the engine starts.If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.. If the engine is very hard to

start in extremely coldweather or when restarting,depress the acceleratorpedal a little (approximately1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine.Release the key and theaccelerator pedal when theengine starts.

. If the engine is very hard tostart because it is flooded,depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to thefloor and hold it. Crank theengine for five tosix seconds.

After cranking the engine,release the acceleratorpedal. Crank the enginewith your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turningthe ignition key to START.Release the key when theengine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run,repeat the aboveprocedure.

{ Caution

Do not operate the starter formore than 15 seconds at a time.If the engine does not start, turnthe key off and wait 10 secondsbefore cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for atleast 30 seconds after starting.Do not race the engine whilewarming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first,especially in cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the enginerunning for a minimum of two tothree minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping theengine over a short period oftime may make the vehicle moredifficult to start.

Note: Care should be taken toavoid situations that can lead topotential battery discharge andpotential no-start conditionssuch as:

1. Installation or extended use ofelectronic accessories thatconsume battery power whenthe engine is not running (Phonechargers, GPS, DVDplayers, etc.).



2. Vehicle is not driven regularlyand/or only driven shortdistances. In these cases, thebattery may need to be chargedto maintain battery health.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Engine Exhaust on page 9-17.

AutomaticTransmission

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

{ Warning

. Do not depress theaccelerator pedal whileshifting from P (Park) orN (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D(Drive) or L (Low). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failureto do so could cause you tolose control and have anaccident.

. Cold engine idle speed ishigh, so use caution whenshifting into a forward orreverse gear before theengine has warmed up.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not downshift abruptly onslippery roads. This maycause a loss of control.

. Never shift to P (Park) orR (Reverse) while the vehicleis moving. This could causean accident.

. Except in an emergency, donot shift to the N (Neutral)position while driving.Coasting with thetransmission in theN (Neutral) position maycause serious damage to thetransmission.

{ Caution

When stopping the vehicle on anuphill grade, do not hold thevehicle by depressing theaccelerator pedal. The foot brakeshould be used for this purpose.



The CVT in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to producemaximum power and smoothoperation.

The recommended operatingprocedures for this transmission areshown on the following pages.Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance anddriving enjoyment.

Note: Engine power may beautomatically reduced to protect theCVT if the engine speed increasesquickly when driving on slipperyroads or while being tested on somedynamometers.

Starting the Vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fullydepress the foot brake pedalbefore moving the shift lever outof the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedaldepressed and move the shiftlever into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, thengradually start the vehicle inmotion.

4. Stop the vehicle completelybefore moving the shift lever intothe P (Park) position.

The CVT is designed so the footbrake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to anydrive position while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switchis placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition or if the key is removed.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fullydepress the brake pedal and movethe shift lever from P (Park) to anyof the desired shift positions.

{ Warning

Apply the parking brake if the shiftlever is in any position while theengine is not running. Failure todo so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll awayand result in serious personalinjury or property damage.



If the ignition switch is placed in theOFF or ACC position for any reasonwhile the vehicle is in N (Neutral),or any drive position, the key cannotbe turned to the LOCK position andbe removed from the ignition switch.If this occurs, perform the followingsteps:

1. Apply the parking brake whenthe vehicle is stopped.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park)to park the vehicle and place theignition switch in the LOCKposition to remove the key.

{ Caution

To prevent transmission damage,use the P (Park) or R (Reverse)position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

P (Park): Use the P (Park) shiftlever position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped. The brake pedal must be

depressed and the shift lever buttonpushed in to move the shift leverfrom N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on ahill, apply the parking brake first,then place the shift lever into theP (Park) position.

{ Caution

To prevent transmission damage,use the P (Park) or R (Reverse)position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

R (Reverse): Use the R (Reverse)position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position.R (Reverse) speed is limited to 30MPH (48 km/h). Do not exceed 30MPH (48 km/h) in the R (Reverse)position. The brake pedal must bedepressed and the shift lever buttonpushed in to move the shift leverfrom P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral): Neither forward norreverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in thisposition. You may shift toN (Neutral) and restart a stalledengine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive): Use this position for allnormal forward driving.

L (Low): Use this position forengine braking on steep downhillgradients/climbing steep slopes andwhenever approaching sharp bends.Do not use the L (Low) position inany other circumstances.

Engine power may be automaticallyreduced to protect the CVT if theengine speed increases quicklywhen driving on slippery roads orwhile being tested on somedynamometers.



Shift Lock Release

If the battery is discharged, the shiftlever may not be moved from theP (Park) position even with the footbrake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, perform thefollowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch to theLOCK position and removethe key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock releasecover using a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock releaseusing a suitable tool.

5. Push the shift lever button andmove the shift lever to theN (Neutral) position whileholding down the shift lockrelease.

Place the ignition switch in the ONposition to unlock the steeringwheel. The vehicle may be movedto the desired location.

Replace the removed shift lockrelease cover after the operation.

If the shift lever cannot be movedout of the P (Park) position, have adealer check the CVT system assoon as possible.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF Switch

When the O/D OFF switch ispressed with the shift lever in the D(Drive) position, the light in theinstrument panel illuminates. SeeOverdrive Off Light on page 5-15.

Use the Overdrive off mode whenyou need improved engine braking.

To turn off the Overdrive off mode,push the O/D OFF switch again.The indicator light will turn off.



Each time the engine is started,or when the shift lever is shifted toany position other than D (Drive),the Overdrive off mode will beautomatically turned off.

Accelerator Downshift in DPosition

For passing or hill climbing, depressthe accelerator pedal to the floor.This shifts the transmission downinto a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail Safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs,the CVT will not be shifted into theselected driving position.

If the vehicle is driven underextreme conditions, such asexcessive wheel spinning andsubsequent hard braking, thefail-safe system may be activated.The MIL may come on to indicatethe fail-safe mode is activated. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-11. This will occur even if allelectrical circuits are functioning

properly. In this case, place theignition switch in the OFF positionand wait for 10 seconds. Then placethe ignition switch back in the ONposition. The vehicle should returnto its normal operating condition. If itdoes not return to its normaloperating condition, have a dealercheck the transmission and repair ifnecessary.

{ Warning

When the high fluid temperatureprotection mode or fail-safeoperation occurs, vehicle speedmay be gradually reduced. Thereduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increasethe chance of a collision. Beespecially careful when driving.If necessary, pull to the side ofthe road at a safe place and allowthe transmission to return tonormal operation, or have itrepaired if necessary.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)

{ Warning

. The ABS is a sophisticateddevice, but it cannot preventaccidents resulting fromcareless or dangerous drivingtechniques. It can helpmaintain vehicle controlduring braking on slipperysurfaces. Remember thatstopping distances onslippery surfaces will belonger than on normalsurfaces even with ABS.Stopping distances may alsobe longer on rough, gravel orsnow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the vehicle in front of you.Ultimately, the driver isresponsible for safety.

. Tire type and condition mayalso affect brakingeffectiveness.

. When replacing tires, installthe specified size of tires onall four wheels.

. When installing a spare tire,make sure that it is the propersize and type as specified onthe Tire and LoadingInformation label.

. For additional information,refer to “Wheels and Tires” inthe “Vehicle Care” section ofthis manual.

This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system thathelps prevent a braking skid. The

ABS operates at speeds above5–10 km/h (3–6 mph). The speedvaries according to road conditions.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

Metric English

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-15.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses the wheels areslowing down. If one of the wheels

is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You may hear the ABS



pump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate. This isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Brake Force Distribution

During braking while driving throughturns, the system optimizes thedistribution of force to each of thefour wheels depending on the radiusof the turn.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull upon the parking brake handle. It isnot necessary to press the releasebutton in while applying the parkingbrake. If the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the brake systemwarning light will come on. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5-14.

{ Warning

. Be sure the parking brake isfully released before driving.Failure to do so can causebrake failure and lead to anaccident.

. Do not release the parkingbrake from outside thevehicle.

. Do not use the shift lever inplace of the parking brake.When parking, be sure theparking brake is fullyengaged.

. Do not leave childrenunattended in a vehicle. Theycould release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To release the parking brake:

1. Shift the transmission toP (Park). Hold the brakepedal down.



2. Pull the parking brake handle upuntil you can press the releasebutton.

3. Hold the release button in asyou move the brake handle allthe way down.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

Parking Brake Break-in

Break-in the brake shoes wheneverthe effect of the parking brake isweakened or whenever the brakeshoes and/or drums are replaced, inorder to assure the best brakeperformance. This procedure can beperformed at the dealer.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and ElectronicStability Control, an electronicstability control system. Thesesystems use various sensors tomonitor driver inputs and vehiclemotion. Under certain drivingconditions, the TCS and ElectronicStability Control systems help toperform the following functions:. Control brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drivewheel so power is transferred toa non–slipping drive wheel onthe same axle.

. Control brake pressure andengine output to reduce drivewheel slip based on vehiclespeed (traction control function).

. Control brake pressure atindividual wheels and engineoutput to help the driver maintaincontrol of the vehicle in thefollowing conditions:

‐ Understeer (vehicle tends tonot follow the steered pathdespite increased steeringinput)

‐ Oversteer (vehicle tends tospin due to certain road ordriving conditions)

TCS and Electronic Stability Controlcan help the driver to maintaincontrol of the vehicle, but cannotprevent loss of vehicle control in alldriving situations.

When the TCS and ElectronicStability Control systems operate,the d indicator in the instrumentcluster flashes to note the following:. The road may be slippery or the

system may determine someaction is required to help keepthe vehicle on the steered path.



. You may feel a pulsation in thebrake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood.This is normal and indicates thatthe traction control system isworking properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving tothe road conditions.

See Traction Control System (TCS)/Electronic Stability Control Light onpage 5-16 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light onpage 5-16.

If a malfunction occurs in thesystems, the d indicator comes onin the instrument cluster. The TCSand Electronic Stability Controlsystems automatically turn off whenthe indicator light is on.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The TCS/Electronic Stability Controlbutton is on the instrument panel, tothe left of the steering wheel.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off TCS and ElectronicStability Control, press and releasethe g button. The Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) Off Light gcomes on and stays on in theinstrument cluster.

To turn TCS and Electronic StabilityControl on again, press and releasethe g button. The Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) Off Light gdisplayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

When the TCS/Electronic StabilityControl button is used to turn off thesystems, the TCS system stilloperates to prevent one drive wheelfrom slipping by transferring powerto a non–slipping drive wheel.The d indicator flashes if thisoccurs. All other functions are offand the d indicator will not flash.

The TCS and Electronic StabilityControl systems are automaticallyreset to on when the ignition isplaced in the OFF position thenback to the ON position.

The systems have a built indiagnostic feature that test thesystems each time the engine isstarted and the vehicle movedforward or in reverse at a slowspeed. When the test occurs a clunk



noise may be heard and/or apulsation in the brake pedal may befelt. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

{ Warning

. The Traction Control System(TCS) and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system aredesigned to help the drivermaintain stability but do notprevent accidents due toabrupt steering operation athigh speeds or by careless ordangerous drivingtechniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especiallycareful when driving andcornering on slipperysurfaces and always drivecarefully.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not modify the vehicle’ssuspension. If suspensionparts such as shockabsorbers, struts, springs,stabilizer bars, bushings, andwheels are not recommendedfor your vehicle or areextremely deteriorated, theTCS and ESC systems maynot operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehiclehandling performance, andthe d indicator may flash or

the d indicator light mayilluminate.

. If brake related parts such asbrake pads, rotors, andcalipers are notrecommended or areextremely deteriorated, theTCS and ESC systems may

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not operate properly and thed indicator light mayilluminate.

. If engine control related partsare not recommended or areextremely deteriorated, the dindicator light may illuminate.

. When driving on extremelyinclined surfaces such ashigher banked corners, theTCS and ESC systems maynot operate properly andthe d indicator may flash or

the d indicator light mayilluminate. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

. When driving on an unstablesurface such as a turntable,ferry, elevator, or ramp, the dindicator may flash or the dindicator light may illuminate.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

This is not a malfunction.Restart the engine afterdriving onto a stable surface.

. If wheels or tires other thanthe recommended ones areused, the TCS and ESCsystems may not operateproperly and the d indicator

may flash or the d indicatorlight may illuminate.

. The TCS and ESC systemsare not a substitute for wintertires or tire chains on a snowcovered road.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not usecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If equipped with cruise control, aspeed of about 48 km/h (30 mph) ormore can be maintained withoutkeeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about48 km/h (30 mph).

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

CRUISE ON/OFF: Press to turncruise control on or off. The whiteindicator comes on in the instrumentcluster when cruise control isturned on.

ACCEL/RES (Accelerate/Resume): If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate. If cruise controlis already active, use to increasevehicle speed.



COAST/SET: Press briefly to setthe speed and activate cruisecontrol, or press and hold todecelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasevehicle speed.

CANCEL: Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the CRUISE ON/OFF button is onwhen not in use, the COAST/SET orACCEL/RES button could getpressed and go into cruise when notdesired. Keep the CRUISE ON/OFFbutton off when cruise is notbeing used.

1. Press CRUISE ON/OFF to turnthe cruise system on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release COAST/SET.The desired set speed brieflyappears in the instrumentcluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 48 km/h (30 mph) or more,briefly press ACCEL/RES. Thevehicle returns to the previous setspeed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold ACCEL/RES

until the desired speed isreached, then release it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressACCEL/RES. For each press,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold COAST/SET

until the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

. To decrease the vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressCOAST/SET. For each press,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing COAST/SET will result incruise set to the current vehiclespeed.



Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.. Press CANCEL.. Shift the transmission to

N (Neutral).. To turn off cruise control, press

CRUISE ON/OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if CRUISE ON/OFF is pressed or if the vehicle isturned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Parking Assist

{ Warning

. Always turn and look backbefore backing up. The RPAis not a substitute for properbacking procedures.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Read and understand thelimitations of the rear parkingassist system as contained inthis section. Inclementweather may affect thefunction of the RPA; this mayinclude reduced performanceor a false activation.

. This system is not designedto prevent contact with smallor moving objects.

. The system is designed as aaid to the driver in detectinglarge stationary objects tohelp avoid damaging thevehicle. The system will notdetect small objects belowthe bumper, and may notdetect objects close to thebumper or on the ground.

. If your vehicle sustainsdamage to the rear bumperfascia, leaving it misaligned

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

or bent, the sensing zonemay be altered causinginaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Parking Assist (RPA)sounds a tone to warn the driver ofobstacles near the rear bumperwhen the shift lever is inR (Reverse). The system may notdetect objects at speeds above5 km/h (3 mph) and may not detectcertain angular or moving objects.

The RPA detects objects up to 1.8 m(5.9 ft) from the rear bumper with adecreased coverage area at theouter corners of the bumper. As youmove closer to the obstacle, the rateof the tone increases. When theobstacle is less than 25 cm (10 in)away, the tone will soundcontinuously. If the RPA detects astationary or receding object furtherthan 25 cm (10 in) from the side ofthe vehicle, the tone will sound for

only three seconds. Once thesystem detects an objectapproaching, the tone will soundagain.

The RPA automatically turns onwhen the shift lever is placed inR (Reverse) and the ignition switchis in ON. The RPA OFF switch onthe instrument panel allows thedriver to turn the RPA on and off. Toturn the RPA off, the ignition switchmust be placed in ON. An indicatorlight on the switch will illuminatewhen the system is turned off. If theindicator light illuminates when theRPA is not turned off, it may indicatea malfunction in the RPA.

Keep the RPA sensors, located onthe rear bumper, free from snow,ice, and large accumulations of dirt.Do not clean the sensors with sharpobjects. If the sensors are covered,it will affect the accuracy ofthe RPA.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)When the shift lever is shifted intoR (Reverse), the display shows theview to the rear of the vehicle.

{ Warning

. Failure to follow the warningsand instructions for properuse of the Rear VisionCamera (RVC) could result inserious injury or death.

. The RVC is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute forproper backing. Always turnand look out the windows,and check mirrors to be surethat it is safe to move beforeoperating the vehicle. Alwaysback up slowly.

. The system is designed as anaid to the driver in showinglarge stationary objects

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

directly behind the vehicle, tohelp avoid damaging thevehicle.

. The system cannotcompletely eliminate blindspots and may not showevery object.

. Underneath the bumper andthe corner areas of thebumper cannot be viewed onthe RVC display because ofits monitoring range limitation.The system will not showsmall objects below thebumper, and may not showobjects close to the bumperor on the ground.

. Objects viewed on the RVCdisplay differ from actualdistance because awide-angle lens is used.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Objects on the RVC displaywill appear visually oppositethan when viewed in therearview and outside mirrors.

. Make sure that the backdoors are securely closedwhen backing up.

. Do no put anything on therearview camera. Therearview camera is installedon the back door.

. When washing the vehiclewith high pressure water, besure not to spray it aroundthe camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unitcausing water condensationon the lens, a malfunction,fire, or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the camera. It isa precision instrument.Otherwise, it may malfunctionor cause damage resulting ina fire or an electric shock.

{ Caution

There is a plastic cover over thecamera. Do not scratch the coverwhen cleaning dirt or snow fromthe cover.

How to Read the Displayed Lines

1. Vehicle Body Line2. 0.5 m (1.5 ft)3. 1 m (3 ft)4. 2 m (7 ft)5. 3 m (10 ft)



Guidelines indicating the vehiclewidth and distance to objects withreference to the vehicle body lineare shown on the RVC display.

The guidelines can be turned on oroff. When the shift lever is inR (Reverse), press the CAMERAbutton to switch the guidelines onand off. When the shift lever is inany other position, press theCAMERA button and then touch theShow Guidelines key to switch theguidelines on and off.

Difference Between Predictedand Actual Distances

The distance guideline and thevehicle width guideline should beused as a reference only when thevehicle is on a level, paved surface.The distance viewed on the displayis for reference only and may bedifferent than the actual distancebetween the vehicle and displayedobjects.

Backing up on a Steep Uphill

1. Displayed Distance

2. Actual Distance

When backing up the vehicle up ahill, the distance guidelines and thevehicle width guidelines are showncloser than the actual distance. Forexample, the display shows 1m(3 ft) to 1, but the actual 1 m (3 ft)distance on the hill is 2. Note thatany object on the hill is further thanit appears on the display.



Backing up on a Steep Downhill

1. Displayed Distance

2. Actual Distance

When backing up the vehicle downa hill, the distance guidelines andthe vehicle width guidelines areshown farther than the actualdistance. For example, the displayshows 1m (3 ft) to 1, but the actual1 m (3 ft) distance on the hill is 2.Note that any object on the hill iscloser than it appears on thedisplay.

Backing up Behind a ProjectingObject



1. Object2. Displayed Distance to Object3. Actual Distance to Object

The position 1 is shown farther thanthe position 2 in the display.However, the position 1 is actuallyat the same distance as the position3. The vehicle may hit the objectwhen backing up to the position 3 ifthe object projects over the actualbacking up course.

Adjusting the Screen

The procedure for adjusting thedisplay settings of the screen differsdepending on the type of screenpresent on the vehicle.

For vehicles without NavigationSystem:

1. Firmly apply the brake and placethe shift lever in R (Reverse).

2. Press the ENTER/SETTINGbutton.

3. The screen will display theBrightness settings.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob toadjust the setting up or down.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTINGbutton again to display theContrast settings.


7. Press the ENTER/SETTINGbutton to complete theadjustment.

Do not adjust the display settings ofthe RVC while the vehicle ismoving.

For vehicles with NavigationSystem:

1. Firmly apply the brake and placethe shift lever in R (Reverse).

2. Press theB button on thecontrol panel.

3. The screen will display the Nightsettings.


5. Press theB button again toaccess the Auto settings.


Do not adjust the display settings ofthe RVC while the vehicle ismoving.

Operating Tips

{ Caution

. Do not use alcohol, benzineor thinner to clean thecamera. This will causediscoloration. To clean thecamera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mildcleaning agent and then wipewith a dry cloth.

. Do not damage the cameraas the monitor screen may beadversely affected.



. When the shift lever is shifted toR (Reverse), the screenautomatically changes to theRVC mode. However, the radiocan be heard.

. It may take some time until theRVC is displayed after the shiftlever has been shifted toR (Reverse). Objects may bedistorted momentarily until theRVC screen is displayedcompletely. When the shift leveris returned to a position otherthan R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screenchanges. Objects on the screenmay be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

. When the temperature isextremely high or low, thescreen may not clearly displayobjects. This is not amalfunction.

. When strong light directly entersthe camera, objects may not bedisplayed clearly.

. Vertical lines may be seen inobjects on the screen. This isdue to strong reflected light fromthe bumper. This is not amalfunction.

. The screen may flicker underfluorescent light. This is not amalfunction.

. The colors of objects on thedisplay may differ somewhatfrom those of the actual object.

. When the contrast of objects islow at night, pressing theSETTING button or MENUbutton may not change thebrightness.

. Objects on the display may notbe clear in a dark place or atnight.

. If dirt, rain or snow attaches tothe camera, the RVC may notdisplay objects. Clean thecamera.

. Do not use body wax on thecamera window. If body waxdoes get on the camera window,wipe off the wax with a cleancloth dampened with milddetergent diluted with water.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S. and Canada, tohelp keep the engine clean andmaintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend usingTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.

Use regular unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 87 or

higher. Do not use gasoline with anoctane rating below 87, as it maycause engine damage and will lowerfuel economy.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. The fuelsindustry automatically modifies thefuel for the appropriate season.If fuel is left in the vehicle tank forlong periods of time, driving orstarting could be affected. Drive thevehicle until the fuel is at one-halftank or less, then refuel with thecurrent seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenatessuch as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines, areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inFlexFuel vehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines, mainly high octaneracing gasolines, can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines and/or fuel additives withMMT as they can reduce spark pluglife and affect emission controlsystem performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, see your dealerfor service.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-11. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, manganese, or any otherfuel not recommended. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improperfuel would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-37.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange can help. Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS is the only

gasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way.

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the passenger side of thevehicle. The fuel door release isbelow the instrument panel. To openthe fuel-filler door, pull the release.To lock, close the fuel-filler doorsecurely.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-60.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make surethe cap is fully installed.



{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap may not fit properly,may cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-11.

LOOSE FUEL CAP WarningMessage

The LOOSE FUEL CAP messagedisplays in the odometer when thefuel cap is not tightened correctlyafter the vehicle has been refueled.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5-20.

Failure to tighten the fuel capproperly after the LOOSE FUELCAP warning message is displayedmay cause the malfunction indicatorlight (MIL) to turn on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-11.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-28 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-29.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-28Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46


10-2 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-54

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-58Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.


Vehicle Care 10-3

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29.

{ Warning

Any modifications or alterations ofthis vehicle may affect the safetyof the vehicle which may result ina collision, serious personal injuryor death.

Modifications made to this vehicleby conversion companies ordealers may affect the finalcertification of the engine, vehicle,or equipment. The conversioncompany or dealer has theresponsibility to certify that thealtered vehicle and equipment

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

complies or continues to complywith all applicable motor vehiclesafety standards and emissionsregulations. The conversioncompany or dealer is responsiblefor making sure the modificationsor installed equipment does notaffect the safety of the vehicle.

GM does not assume theresponsibility as the final stagemanufacturer for modified oraltered vehicles. GM is notresponsible for the finalcertification, product liabilityclaims, or warranty claims,resulting from any component,assembly, or system beingaltered. GM is not responsible formodifications which cause thevehicle to become non-compliantwith any of the motor vehiclesafety standards, emissions

(Continued)


10-4 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

regulations, or modifications thatcause the vehicle to be orbecome defective or unsafe.

Your vehicle’s warranty may notcover damage resulting fromalterations, modifications,installation of non-approvedaccessories, or improperinstallation of accessories. Referto your Warranty InformationBooklet for complete details.

Variable Voltage Control System

{ Caution

. Do not ground accessoriesdirectly to the batteryterminal. Doing so will bypassthe variable voltage controlsystem and the vehiclebattery many not chargecompletely.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Use electrical accessorieswith the engine running toavoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Your vehicle is equipped with avariable voltage control system.This system measures the amountof electrical discharge from thebattery and controls voltagegenerated by the generator. Thecurrent sensor is located near thebattery along the negative batterycable. If you add electricalaccessories to your vehicle, be sureto ground them to a suitable bodyground such as the frame or engineblock area.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-28.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-12.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock releasehandle located below theinstrument panel on the left sideof the steering wheel.


10-6 Vehicle Care

2. Go to the front of the vehicle,locate the hood release lever inbetween the hood and grille, andpush the lever sideways withyour fingertips.

3. Raise the hood.

4. Release the hood prop from itsunderhood retainer.

5. Securely place the hood propinto the slot in the front of theengine compartment.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop from theslot in the front of the enginecompartment and return the propto its underhood retainer. Theprop rod must click into placewhen returning it to the retainerto prevent hood damage.

2. Lower the hood to approximately12 in (30 cm) above the hoodrelease latch and release it.Check to make sure the hood isclosed and repeat the process ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-7

Engine Compartment Overview


10-8 Vehicle Care

1. Coolant Recovery Tank. SeeCooling System on page 10-13.

2. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-8.

3. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid onpage 10-19.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-11.

5. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.

6. Drive Belt.

7. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-8.

8. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10-13.

9. Battery on page 10-21.

10. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-25.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-7 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.


Vehicle Care 10-9

2. Pull out the dipstick and wipe itwith a clean paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

It should be between the H (High)and L (Low) marks. This is thenormal operating oil level range.If the oil level is below the L (Low)mark, remove the oil filler cap andpour recommended oil through theopening. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-7 for thelocation of the engine oil fill cap.

Add some of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2. Add enough oil to putthe level somewhere in the properoperating range. Do not overfill.Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen through.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine could

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

be damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10.

Specification

Ask for and use engine oils thatmeet the dexos1™ specification.

Engine oils that have beenapproved by GM as meeting thedexos1 specification are markedwith the dexos1 approved logo. Seewww.gmdexos.com.


10-10 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos1 is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos1-approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oil thatmeets American Petroleum Institute(API) approved specifications of theappropriate viscosity grade. Theseoils have the API certification markon the front of the container.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting thedexos1 specification are all that isneeded for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) Fluid

{ Caution

. GM recommends usingACDelco CVT Fluid(Part No. 19260800, inCanada 19299096) in CVT.Do not mix with other fluids.

. Do not use Automatictransmission fluid (AFT) orManual Transmission fluid ina CVT, as it may damage theCVT. Damage caused by theuse of fluids other than asrecommended is not coveredunder the vehicle warranty.

. Using fluids that are notequivalent to ACDelco CVTFluid (Part No. 19260800, inCanada 19299096) maydamage the CVT. Damagecaused by the use of fluids

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

other than as recommendedis not covered under thevehicle warranty.

When checking or replacement ofCVT fluid is required, see yourdealer for servicing.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is nearthe rear of the engine compartmenton the driver side. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3. If driving industy/dirty conditions, inspect thefilter at each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake it to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remainscovered with dirt, a new filter isrequired. Never use compressed airto clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Air Cleaner/Filter Cover2. Air Cleaner/Filter Tabs (2)


10-12 Vehicle Care

1. Push the tabs (2) in at both endsof the air cleaner/filter cover (1).

2. Pull the air cleaner/filtercover (1) up from the air cleaner/filter assembly.

3. Remove the air cleaner holderand filter from the engine aircleaner housing. Be careful todislodge as little dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter housing.

5. Remove the air cleaner/filterfrom the air cleaner holder.

6. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter. Make sure that thefilter fits properly into the aircleaner holder.

7. Reinstall the air cleaner/filter onthe air cleaner holder and slidethem into the air cleanerhousing.

8. Reinstall the air cleaner/filtercover and be sure that the tabsclick into place.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Warning

Never pour fuel into the throttlebody or attempt to start theengine with the air cleanerremoved. Doing so could result inserious injury.


Vehicle Care 10-13

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1. Coolant Recovery Tank

2. Radiator Pressure Cap3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out

of View)

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other than therecommended engine coolant cancause premature engine, heatercore, or radiator corrosion. Inaddition, the engine coolant couldrequire changing sooner. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe recommended engine coolant.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with long life antifreezecoolant. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-10.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-16.


10-14 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding water or some other liquidto the cooling system can bedangerous. Water and otherliquids can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. The coolantwarning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. Withwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catchfire and you or others could beburned. Use the recommendedengine coolant. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10.

Use the recommended enginecoolant. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-10.If using this coolant, nothing elseneeds to be added. This coolant:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If the improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only therecommended engine coolant forthe cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, by pouring iton the ground, or by pouring intosewers, streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Checking Engine CoolantLevel

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check the coolant level in thereservoir when the engine is cold.If the coolant level is below the MINlevel, add coolant to the MAX level.If the reservoir is empty, check thecoolant level in the radiator whenthe engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fillthe radiator with coolant up to thefiller opening and also add it to thereservoir up to the MAX level.

The vehicle contains long lifecoolant. The life expectancy of thefactory-fill coolant is 168,000 km(105,000 miles) or seven years.Mixing any other type of coolant orthe use of non-distilled water willreduce the life expectancy of thefactory-fill coolant. Refer to theRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10 for moredetails.

The engine coolant reservoir is apressurized tank. When installingthe cap, tighten.


10-16 Vehicle Care

If the cooling system frequentlyrequires coolant, have it checked byyour dealer.

Changing Engine Coolant

A dealer can change the enginecoolant. The service procedure canbe found in the service manual. SeeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

Improper servicing can result inreduced heater performance andengine overheating.

{ Warning

. To avoid the danger of beingscalded, never change thecoolant when the engineis hot.

. Never remove the radiator orengine coolant reservoir capwhen the engine is hot.Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluidescaping from the radiator.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Avoid direct skin contact withused coolant. If skin contactis made, wash thoroughlywith soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

. Keep coolant out of the reachof children and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed ofproperly. Check your localregulations.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an engine coolanttemperature warning light on theinstrument cluster to warn of engineoverheating. See Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light onpage 5-17.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway, see Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13-5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, the fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

See if the engine cooling fan speedincreases when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-17

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThe engine has an engineprotection mode to reduce thechance of damage if the coolanttemperature goes too high (forexample, when climbing steepgrades in high temperature withheavy loads, such as when towing atrailer). When the enginetemperature reaches a certain level:. The engine coolant temperature

warning light will illuminate.. Engine power may be reduced.. The air conditioning cooling

function may be automaticallyturned OFF for a short time (theblower will continue to operate).

Engine power and under certainconditions, vehicle speed willdecrease. Vehicle speed can becontrolled with the acceleratorpedal, but the vehicle may notaccelerate at the desired speed.

The transmission will downshift orupshift as it reaches prescribed shiftpoints. You can also shift manually.

As driving conditions change andengine coolant temperature isreduced, vehicle speed can beincreased using the acceleratorpedal, and air conditioning coolingfunction will automatically be turnedback ON.

If:

1. The engine coolant temperatureis not reduced.

2. The air conditioning coolingfunction does not turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature highwarning light illuminates, thismay indicate a malfunction.Move the vehicle off the road ina safe area and allow the engineto cool. If after checking the oiland coolant, the oil pressurelow/engine coolant temperature


10-18 Vehicle Care

high warning light remains on,do not continue to drive, callyour dealer.

The malfunction indicator light (MIL)may also come ON. If only itremains on, you do not need tohave the vehicle towed, but have itinspected soon by your dealer. Foradditional information, seeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-11.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe reservoir is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7 for reservoir location.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.


Vehicle Care 10-19

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake pads should be replaced ascomplete sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacementparts. If this is not done, the brakesmay not work properly. The braking

performance expected can changein many other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts areinstalled or parts are improperlyinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-7 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.


10-20 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-7.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

If the brake fluid is below the MINline, the brake warning light willilluminate. Add brake fluid up to theMAX line.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-21

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not removethe cap and do not add fluid.

Refer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-7 for battery location.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-55 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Extended Storage Switch

If any electrical equipment does notoperate, remove the extendedstorage switch and check for anopen fuse.

Note: The extended storage switchis used for long term vehiclestorage. Even if the extendedstorage switch is broken it is notnecessary to replace it. Replaceonly the open fuse in the switch witha new fuse.


10-22 Vehicle Care

How to replace the extendedstorage switch:

1. To remove the extended storageswitch, be sure the ignitionswitch is in the OFF or LOCKposition.

2. Be sure the headlight switch isin the OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs (1)and (2) found on each side ofthe storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straightout from the fuse box (3).

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-11.

{ Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not allowthe wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-24.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Release the clip on theconnector.

3. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.

Turn Signal and Parking Lamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Replacement BulbsLamp Bulb

Number

Headlamp H13

Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamp

3457K

Map Lamp W5W

Cargo Lamp W5W

High-MountedStop Lamp

W16W

Tail Lamp 3047

Back-Up Lamp 921

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

3157AK

LicensePlate Lamp

T10

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Spare fuses are provided and canbe found in the passengercompartment fuse box.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The fuse block is in the enginecompartment of the vehicle.Remove the cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

Fusible Links

If the electrical equipment does notoperate and fuses are in goodcondition, check the fusible links.If any of these fusible links aremelted, replace with only GenuineGMus parts.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

Pull the fuse box cover to remove.Push the fuse box cover to install.

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-27

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to meetall-season requirements have MSmolded onto the sidewall. Thissymbol can usually be foundfollowing the size designation.

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-27.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-41.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.


10-28 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving at temperaturesbelow approximately 5°C (40°F) oron ice or snow covered roads isexpected. See Winter Tires onpage 10-27.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have All-TerrainTires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 8000 km(5,000 mi) intervals if irregular wearis noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection onpage 10-39.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the


Vehicle Care 10-29

U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(4) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(5) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10-44.

(6) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-35 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


10-30 Vehicle Care

(2) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page 10-35and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two

digits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-35 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in


Vehicle Care 10-31

the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck(LT-Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.


10-32 Vehicle Care

(6) Load Range: Load Range.

(7) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load. Thisdoes not apply to GoodyearLT225/75R16 G949 RSA andGoodyear LT225/75R16 G933RSD commercial truck tires; seethe dual tire and single tiremaximum load and load rangeletter designations on the tiresidewall.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of

the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-35.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT code


Vehicle Care 10-33

includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-35 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-41.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into the

sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-44.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-9.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and an

example of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-9. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10-54 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning


10-36 Vehicle Care

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.


Vehicle Care 10-37

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-37.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-12.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning light

located on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9.

A message displays when the lowtire pressure warning light comes onand low tire pressure is detected.See Tire Messages on page 5-20.

The message and low tire pressurewarning light come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. The vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 25 km/h(16 mph) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressurewarning light.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the


10-38 Vehicle Care

air pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-9, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-35.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-39, Tire Rotation onpage 10-39 and Tires onpage 10-26.

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damage

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

caused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. The malfunctionlight comes on at each ignition cycleuntil the problem is corrected. Someof the conditions that can causethese to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a

TPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight should go off after the roadtire is replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light should go offafter successfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheels


Vehicle Care 10-39

other than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-41.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight comes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacing

a spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light will go off when thevehicle is driven at speeds above25 km/h (16 mph) after the nextignition cycle.

See your dealer to perform theTPMS sensor matching process.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every8 000 km (5,000 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-41and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-45.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-35and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-9.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-37.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven(1 000 km (600 mi).

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 10-41

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-39 and TireRotation on page 10-39.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. Thefirst two digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits, theyear. For example, the third week ofthe year 2010 would have afour-digit DOT date of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be free

of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresThe original equipment tiresinstalled were designed withrequirements to specificallymatch the vehicle.

Over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance were considered.


10-42 Vehicle Care

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-39 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle (twofor single rear wheels, four fordual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

When replacement tires areneeded, GM stronglyrecommends buying the sameoriginal equipment spec tires.

This vehicle is equipped withspecial high load tires with aload index of 94.

When purchasing replacementtires, this load index must befollowed, or max payloadcapacity will be reduced.

Refer to the tire information label.

SizeCold TireInflationPressure

Front Original Tire:185/60R15C 94/92T

44 psi(300 kPa)

Rear Original Tire:185/60R15C 94/92T

48 psi(325 kPa)

Spare Tire (Front):185/60R15C 94/92T

44 psi(300 kPa)

Spare Tire (Rear):185/60R15C 94/92T

48 psi(325 kPa)

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GM

(Continued)


10-44 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

specific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-41 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements.

Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under


Vehicle Care 10-45

controlled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead

to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancing

are not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other roadsurface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.


Vehicle Care 10-47

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-26. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-2.


10-48 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the oppositecorner of the tire beingchanged.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The jack and tools are locatedunder the front passenger seat.

1. Move the passenger seatrearward.


Vehicle Care 10-49

2. Remove the tray under thepassenger seat.

3. Turn the jack screwcounterclockwise to loosen it.

4. Lift the jack up.

5. Pull the jack forward.

6. Release the strap to remove thetool bag.

The spare tire is mounted in the rearunderbody of the vehicle.

To lower the spare tire from thevehicle:

1. Open the rear door.


10-50 Vehicle Care

2. Turn the bolt (1)counterclockwise about 40 turnsto lower the spare tire.

Stop turning the bolt when thespare tire is low enough that thetire basket (2) can be removedfrom the hook (3).

3. Push the tire basket (2) upwardto remove it.

4. Lower the tire basket (2) to theground and remove thespare tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Jack Rod2. Cloth

If the vehicle has wheel covers, usethe jack rod (1) to remove it. Apply acloth (2) between the wheel andjack rod (1) to prevent damage.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-47.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethe wheel nuts until the tire is offthe ground.


Vehicle Care 10-51

3. Position the jack under thevehicle, as shown.

The jacking points are indicatedby stamped arrows on the sideof the frame.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

4. Install the assembled jack rodinto the jack, as shown.

5. Turn the jack lever and rodclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle until the tire isoff the ground.

6. Remove all the wheel nuts.

7. Remove the flat tire from themounting surface.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a paper

(Continued)


10-52 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

towel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

9. Place the spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back on.

Tighten each wheel nut byhand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub.

11. Turn the jack lever and rodcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are not tight canwork loose. If all the nuts on awheel come off, the wheel cancome off the vehicle, causing acrash. All wheel nuts must be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

properly tightened. Follow therules in this section to be surethey are.

{ Warning

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspecthubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of loose

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-53

Warning (Continued)

running wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Specifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

Use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts firmly. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise and ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

12. Replace the wheel cover,if equipped.

Remove any wheel blocks.

13. Check the tire pressure.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Reverse the steps for “Removingthe Spare Tire and Tools” toproperly store them.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-35 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9. For instructions onhow to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10-48.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced back onto thevehicle, as soon as possible, so thespare tire will be available in case itis needed again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-21.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Use the followingsteps to do it safely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Explosive hydrogen gas isalways present in the vicinityof the battery. Keep all sparksand flames away from thebattery.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Discharged BatteryPositive (+) Terminal

2. Discharged Battery Negative(−) Grounding Point

3. Good Battery Negative (−)Terminal

4. Good Battery Positive (+)Terminal

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.


10-56 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories from the cigarettelighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and alllamps that are not needed. Thiswill avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations of the othervehicle.

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.


Vehicle Care 10-57

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if equipped.Negative (−) will go to anunpainted metal part or to aremote negative (−) terminal ifequipped.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and possibly other partstoo. Do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+)terminal (1) of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+)

terminal if equipped. Do not letthe other end touch metal.Connect it to the positive (+)terminal (4) of the good battery.Use a remote positive (+)terminal if equipped.

7. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−)terminal (3) of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−)terminal if equipped.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to the shocktower, or to a remotenegative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

8. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) grounding point (2)on the shock tower of the vehiclewith the dead battery.

{ Caution

Make sure the jumper cables donot touch moving parts in theengine compartment and that thecable clamps do not contact anyother metal.

9. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for afew minutes.

10. Keep the engine speed of thebooster vehicle at about 2,000rpm, and start the engine of thevehicle being jump started.

{ Caution

Do not keep the starter motorengaged for more than10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the keyoff and wait three to four secondsbefore trying again.


10-58 Vehicle Care

11. After starting the engine,disconnect jumper cables asdirected below.

12. If it will not start after a fewtries, it probably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Push Starting

{ Caution

. Do not push start this vehicle.The three-way catalyst maybe damaged.

. Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) modelscannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to doso may cause transmissiondamage.

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types


Vehicle Care 10-59

of recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

{ Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would not

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.

The vehicle should not be towedwith all four wheels on the ground.

Dolly Towing


10-60 Vehicle Care

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Put the transmission in P (Park).

4. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive

cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum or stainlesssteel. To prevent damage alwaysfollow these cleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum orstainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the moldings.


10-62 Vehicle Care

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating. Do not clean or wipe themwhen dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create a

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

non-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-10.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, steelfuel door hinge, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and falluse plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the

underbody. Take care to thoroughlyclean any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Use a cloth dampened only withwater to clean the meter andgauge lens.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, or spot removers. Do

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

not use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel ofleather or soft trim, and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampened

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

with a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommended

that GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

This vehicle includes two driver andpassenger side front floor matbrackets. The driver and passengerside floor mats have two grommetholes. Position each mat by placingthe floor mat bracket hook throughthe floor mat grommet holes whilecentering the mat.

Make sure floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Recommended FluidsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-12

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 8 000 km/5,000 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.

Normal Service

All maintenance services, includingthose listed under AdditionalRequired Services, are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-9.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel on page 9-37.

Severe Service

In addition to the normal serviceschedule, some vehicles requireservice more often. Severe serviceis for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high-speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.



{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-5.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-35.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-39.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.

Oil Change, Tire Rotation, andRequired Services Every8 000 km/5,000 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-39.. Change engine oil and filter. See

Engine Oil on page 10-8.. Check engine coolant level. See

Engine Coolant on page 10-13.. Check drive shaft boots.. Check windshield washer fluid

level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-18.



. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-60. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-22.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-35.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-39.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-11.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-60.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-13.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-60.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

8000km/5,000mi

16000km/10,000mi

24000km/15,000mi

32000km/20,000mi

40000km/25,000mi

48000km/30,000mi

56000km/35,000mi

64000km/40,000mi

72000km/45,000mi

80000km/50,000mi

88000km/55,000mi

96000km/60,000mi

104000km/65,000mi

112000km/70,000mi

120000km/75,000mi

128000km/80,000mi

136000km/85,000mi

144000km/90,000mi

152000km/95,000mi

160000km/100,000mi

Change engine oil and filter, rotate tires, andperform Required Services. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace brake fluid. (5) @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(2) If operating mainly in dustyconditions, more frequentmaintenance may be required.

(3) First replacement interval is160 000 km (100,000 mi) or84 months. After first replacement,replace every 120 000 km(75,000 mi) or 60 months. SeeCooling System on page 10-13.

(4) After 64 000 km (40,000 mi) or48 months, inspect every 16 000 km(10,000 mi) or 12 months. Replacethe drive belts if found damaged.

(5) Or every three years, whicheveroccurs first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

8000km/5,000mi

16000km/10,000mi

24000km/15,000mi

32000km/20,000mi

40000km/25,000mi

48000km/30,000mi

56000km/35,000mi

64000km/40,000mi

72000km/45,000mi

80000km/50,000mi

88000km/55,000mi

96000km/60,000mi

104000km/65,000mi

112000km/70,000mi

120000km/75,000mi

128000km/80,000mi

136000km/85,000mi

144000km/90,000mi

152000km/95,000mi

160000km/100,000mi

Change engine oil and filter, rotate tires, andperform Required Services. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (1) @ @ @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (2) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. @

Replace CVT transmission fluid. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (3) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (4) @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace brake fluid. (5) @ @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(2) If operating mainly in dustyconditions, more frequentmaintenance may be required.

(3) First replacement interval is160 000 km (100,000 mi) or84 months. After first replacement,replace every 120 000 km(75,000 mi) or 60 months. SeeCooling System on page 10-13.

(4) After 64 000 km (64,000 mi) or48 months, inspect every 16 000 km(10,000 mi) or 12 months. Replacethe drive belts if found damaged.

(5) Or every three years, whicheveroccurs first.



Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See “UnderbodyMaintenance” in Exterior Careon page 10-60.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.



Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the



rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-64 and Exterior Care onpage 10-60.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil meeting the dexos1™ specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. Look for the dexos1 approved logo for GM approvedengine oil. See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Engine Coolant Prediluted ACDelco CE Long Life Antifreeze Coolant (blue) or equivalent(GM Part No. 19317140). See Engine Coolant on page 10-13.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT)

ACDelco CVT Fluid (Part No. 19260800, in Canada 19299096).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 19316246 A3198C

Engine Oil Filter 19317651 PF2132

Spark Plugs 19316339 —

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (22 in) 19316483 —

Passenger Side – 40 cm (16 in) 19317320 —

Battery 88865293 121RPS



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification andcertificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The fourth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-10 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 7.6 L 8.0 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.1 L 5.4 qt

Fuel Tank 55 L 14.5 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 113Y 83 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 3 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Drive Belt Routing


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-12

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,alerts, and OnStar onboard vehiclediagnostic information. Scheduleservice appointments.

I (Service History): View andprint dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a dealer andview locations, maps, phonenumbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat withonline help representatives.

See my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatured Articles and Auto CareSections.

. Download owner manuals.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872. (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438.)

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

General Motors North America andChevrolet reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

Service is not provided if a vehicleis in an area that is not accessibleto the service vehicle or is not aregularly traveled or maintainedpublic road, which includes ice andwinter roads. Off-road use is notcovered.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is up to 7 liters. Diesel fueldelivery may be restricted.Propane and other fuels are notprovided through this service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over150 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may give

permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is

safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

The Courtesy Transportationprogram is no longer available forcutaway vehicles.



Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, yourdealer may offer the followingtransportation options:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters ofyour dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must besupported by original receipts andwithin the maximum amount allowedby GM for shuttle service. If U.S.customers arrange their owntransportation, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completedrental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements.

Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.Additional fees such as fuel usagecharges, taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repairare also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Contact your dealerfor specific availability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.



Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed from

vehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, we



recommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-20.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.



Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 –$40.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Pouch: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.



Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or record

personal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomplies with Part 15/Part 18 of theFederal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules and withIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,



if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-17

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-10Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

ArmrestFront Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Auxiliary Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

BBack Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-22BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-14

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13


i-2 INDEX

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

CCaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-11CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9

CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Computer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) Fluid . . . 10-11

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4


INDEX i-3

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3

DrivingDefensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-15Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Electronic Stability Control LightTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-7Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-18Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5


i-4 INDEX

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-2Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68FluidBrakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Fuel (cont'd)Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-18Requirements, California . . . . .9-38System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-54FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

GGaugesFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-2Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-19High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6


INDEX i-5

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-13Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJackAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-28LampsCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . 5-11Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

LightElectronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5LightingIllumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-14Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-17

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


i-6 INDEX

Lights (cont'd)High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Low Washer Fluid Warning . . .5-19Overdrive Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-15

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-18Low Washer Fluid WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 11-3Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-11Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12MessagesFuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-13Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

NNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Operating ModeOverheated EngineProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Overdrive Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17


INDEX i-7

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

PParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-17

Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-22Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . 13-14

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-31Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-30Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-14

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


i-8 INDEX

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-14Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-13

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Folding Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Seats (cont'd)Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . 3-42SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-5Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-12Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Special Application Services . . . 11-7

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-15Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


INDEX i-9

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27All-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-37Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-36Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tires (cont'd)Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-45When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-41Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-58Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Traction Control System(TCS)/Electronic StabilityControl Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

TransmissionContinuously Variable . . . . . . . .9-18

Transmission FluidContinuously Variable . . . . . . .10-11

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

UUnderseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16


i-10 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Washer Fluid, Low WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-37Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-22

Documents

Owner's Manual - Chevrolet City Express Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada- Black plate (1,1) 7707496) - 2015 - CRC - 8/13/14 ... Stability Control M: Windshield Washer Fluid